ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM
ROUTING SWITCHER
RS-422A REMOTE ROUTING SWITCHER
DVS-128 DVS-RS1616
TIME CODE ROUTING SWITCHER
DIGITAL AUDIO ROUTING SWITCHER
DVS-TC3232
DVS-A3232
DIGITAL VIDEO ROUTING SWITCHER
ANALOG AUDIO ROUTING SWITCHER
DVS-V1616 BVS-A3232
HD ROUTING SWITCHER
ANALOG VIDEO ROUTING SWITCHER
HDS-V3232 BVS-V3232
DIGITAL VIDEO ROUTING SWITCHER
DVS-V3232B/V3232M
DVS-V6464B/V6464M
MULTI BIT RATE ROUTING SWITCHER
HDS-X3400/X3600/X3700
16-SOURCE CONTROL UNIT
MULTI DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R1601
BKS-R1607/R1617/R1621
X-Y CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R3202/R3210/R3220
MULTI BUS CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R3216
32-SOURCE CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R3203
ROUTING SWITCHER CONTROLLER
BKPF-R70/R70A
UNIVERSAL CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R3204/R1608/R3209
BKS-R1618/R3219
DIGITAL VIDEO 8 x 2 SELECTOR BOARD
BKPF-300
ANALOG VIDEO 8 x 2 SELECTOR BOARD
BKPF-301
SOURCE AND DESTINATION CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R3205
DIGITAL AUDIO 8 x 2 SELECTOR BOARD
BKPF-350
8-DESTINATION CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R3206
ANALOG AUDIO 8 x 2 SELECTOR BOARD
BKPF-351
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR SYSTEM SETUP
1st Edition (Revised 5)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Manual Structure
Purpose of this manual .............................................................................................. 5
Contents ..................................................................................................................... 5
Related manuals......................................................................................................... 6
DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series and DVS-V3232M/V6464M..................................... 8
1. System Overview
1-1. Digital Routing Switcher System ................................................................ 1-1
1-2. System Control ............................................................................................ 1-3
1-2-1. Specifications and functions of control port .............................. 1-3
1-2-2. S-BUS control ............................................................................ 1-5
1-2-3. 9-pin remote control ................................................................... 1-7
1-2-4. Connection of control terminal .................................................. 1-9
1-2-5. Control of monitor S-BUS system ............................................. 1-9
2. Functions
2-1. Main Functions of Router System............................................................... 2-1
2-2. Built-in Controller ....................................................................................... 2-2
2-3. Matrix Sizes ................................................................................................ 2-2
2-4. Number of Levels........................................................................................ 2-2
2-5. Number of Units.......................................................................................... 2-2
2-6. Protect Function .......................................................................................... 2-3
2-7. Secret Function............................................................................................ 2-3
2-8. Crosspoint Disable Setting Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)............................. 2-3
2-9. Password Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70, HDS-V3232) ... 2-3
2-10. Setting the Input/Output Name
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)............................. 2-4
2-11. Virtual Mapping Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)............................. 2-6
2-12. Free Assignment Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)............................. 2-7
2-13. Monitor Function (BKDS-V3292B only) ................................................... 2-8
2-14. Tie Line Management
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)........................... 2-10
2-15. Phantom Function .....................................................................................2-11
2-16. Self-Diagnosis Function ............................................................................ 2-12
2-17. Route Function .......................................................................................... 2-13
2-18. Enhanced Restriction of Selected Block (BKS-R1607/R3210 only)........2-14
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Control Terminal
3-1. Selecting the Control Terminal ................................................................... 3-1
3-2. Control Terminal Display ........................................................................... 3-2
3-3. System Status Screen .................................................................................. 3-3
3-4. Menu Screen................................................................................................ 3-4
3-4-1. Menu screen of the primary station............................................3-4
3-4-2. Menu screen of the secondary station ........................................ 3-5
3-4-3. Menu screen of the primary station on monitor S-BUS............. 3-9
3-4-4. Menu screen of the secondary station on monitor S-BUS ......... 3-9
3-5. Setting Screen............................................................................................ 3-11
4. Setup Procedure
4-1. Outline ......................................................................................................... 4-1
4-2. Preliminary Information Before Installation ............................................... 4-2
4-3. Preparation Before Setup ............................................................................ 4-3
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures ............................................................................... 4-4
4-5. Flowchart of Setup .................................................................................... 4-24
4-6. Setting Up BKPF-300/301/350/351 .......................................................... 4-25
5. System Settings
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station ........................................................... 5-1
A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA ........................................................... 5-1
A : DISPLAY UNIT LOCATION ........................................................... 5-1
B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE ..............................................................5-2
C : SET DESTINATION NAME ............................................................ 5-2
D : SET SOURCE NAME ....................................................................... 5-4
E : SET LEVEL TABLE ......................................................................... 5-6
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER ........................................................5-7
G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER ............................................... 5-7
H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM............................................................... 5-8
J : NAME STYLE ................................................................................ 5-10
K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE ...................................................... 5-11
K : DEFAULT TABLE.......................................................................... 5-11
L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT ................................................... 5-11
M : SET INHIBIT TABLE ..................................................................... 5-13
N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP ............................................ 5-14
O : SET TIE LINES ............................................................................... 5-16
P : CHANGE PASSWORD .................................................................. 5-18
Q : CHANGE CROSSPOINT................................................................ 5-18
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION.................................................... 5-20
S : SELECT INDICATION COLOR
(Except for BKPF-R70, HDS-V3232) ............................................. 5-20
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T : SET CLOCK .................................................................................... 5-20
U : SELECT REMOTE..........................................................................5-21
V : SELECT WARNING DISPLAY ..................................................... 5-22
W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG................................................................. 5-23
X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION......................................... 5-23
Y : DISPLAY TABLE (Except for HDS-V3232) ................................. 5-24
Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE .............................................................5-24
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station ..................................................... 5-25
A : SET UNIT LOCATION...................................................................5-25
G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER ............................................. 5-26
H : SET PHANTOM TABLE ................................................................ 5-27
K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE ...................................................... 5-29
K : DEFAULT TABLE..........................................................................5-29
L : COPY TABLE DATA ..................................................................... 5-29
M : SET MONITOR FUNCTION (Except for HDS-V3232) ................ 5-30
N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203) ........................ 5-30
N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/
R3210/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621) .................................... 5-31
N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R3206/R3216).................................... 5-32
O : SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION (BKS-R3202/R3206) ............ 5-33
O : SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION (BKS-R1607/R3210/R3216/
R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621)............................................... 5-33
R : SET ROUTE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210/R3216/R1617/
R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621) .......................................................... 5-36
S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME .................................................5-37
U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL ................................................... 5-38
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (Except for HDS-V3232) ....................5-39
Y : DISPLAY TABLE DATA (Except for HDS-V3232) ..................... 5-39
Y : SET DISPLAY MODES (BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/
R3220/R1621) .................................................................................. 5-40
Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT (Except for HDS-V3232) ........................ 5-41
Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206)...................... 5-42
Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210/
R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621) ................................... 5-43
Z : SELECT CONNECTION (DVS-RS1616 only) .............................. 5-46
Z : SWITCHING FIELD (HDS-V3232 only) ....................................... 5-46
5-3. Setting Items of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS
(BKDS-V3292B only) .............................................................................. 5-47
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER ...................................................... 5-47
M : SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION ..................................................5-48
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION.................................................... 5-48
5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS
(BKDS-V3293B only) .............................................................................. 5-49
M : SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B + BKDS-R3292B) .................................... 5-49
L : COPY TABLE DATA <MONITOR MENU> ................................5-49
N : SET PANEL TABLE
(BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210)
<MONITOR MENU> ...................................................................... 5-50
S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME <MONITOR MENU> ............ 5-51
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z : SET PANEL STATUS
(BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210)
<MONITOR MENU> ...................................................................... 5-52
5-5. Backup of Setting Data ............................................................................. 5-54
5-6. When Data is Lost ..................................................................................... 5-54
5-7. Initialization of Table Data ....................................................................... 5-55
5-7-1. Initializing Procedure and Corresponding Items...................... 5-55
5-7-2. Default Values Initialization .................................................... 5-56
5-8. Signal Switching Timing........................................................................... 5-57
6. Confirmation of function
6-1. Outline ......................................................................................................... 6-1
6-2. Function Check Format ............................................................................... 6-2
6-3. How the Self-Diagnosis Items are Related ................................................. 6-3
6-4. Diagnosis Items for Each Model ................................................................. 6-4
6-5. Function Check Process .............................................................................. 6-5
6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal ...................................................... 6-6
6-6-1. System status screen after power on .......................................... 6-6
6-6-2. System status screen during the system operation ..................... 6-7
6-6-3. Menu item [W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG]................................6-7
6-6-4. Contents and countermeasures of the error messages ................ 6-8
7. Change Information on DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series
and DVS-V3232M/V6464M
7-1. Outline (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)...................................................... 7-1
7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items) ......................................... 7-2
Initial screen (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)........................................... 7-2
A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ........7-3
B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)........... 7-3
E : SET LEVEL TABLE (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ...................... 7-4
O : SET TIE LINES (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) .............................. 7-4
S : SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ...... 7-6
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items) ..................................... 7-6
N : SET PANEL TABLE (HDS-X3400) ................................................. 7-6
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (DVS-128) ............................................. 7-7
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (HDS-X3000 Series) ............................. 7-8
Z : SET SDI FORMAT (HDS-X3000 Series) ......................................... 7-9
Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT (DVS-V3232M/DVS-V6464M).............. 7-11
Appendix ......................................................................................................... A-1
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Structure
Purpose of this manual
This is the Installation Manual (software) for the Sony routing switcher system (it is
described as “router system” in this manual).
It contains information on the initial settings of the software when installing the
units making up the digital router system.
This manual is intended for system and service engineers. But operators can also
refer to it when setting and changing the system.
This manual is supplied with the following switchers.
DVS-V1616
DVS-TC3232
HDS-V3232
DVS-V3232B
DVS-A3232
DVS-V3232M
DVS-V6464B
BVS-V3232
DVS-V6464M
DVS-RS1616
BVS-A3232
DVS-128
BKPF-R70/R70A
HDS-X3000 series (HDS-X3400/X3600/X3700)
Refer to installation manual and/or maintenance manual supplied with each unit for
information on installing the hardware.
Contents
The following is a summary of the sections for understanding the contents of this
manual.
1. System Overview
This section outlines the basic structure of the digital router system and control
mechanism using the S-BUS.
2. Functions
This section explains the main functions of the digital router system.
3. Control Terminal
This section explains the key operation and image display of the control terminal.
Also describes how to use the personal computer as the control terminal.
4. Setup Procedure
This section explains the basic setting of DVS-V3232B/V6464B or HDS-V3232 as
a primary station.
5. System Settings
This section explains the setting menus of the primary station and the secondary
station and how to set each item in the menus, in detail.
Also it explains how to backup the table data.
6. Confirmation of Function
This section explains the error messages and how to check the operations of the
system after completing setting.
7. Change Information on DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series and DVS-
V3232M/V6464M
Describes the change information accompanied with addition of functions and
specification change.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Related manuals
In addition to this installation manual for system setup, the following manuals are
also available for the main units making up the system.
(1) DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128
. Operation Manual
(supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions.
. Installation Manual (Hardware)
(supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains information on setting up the hardware when installing.
. Maintenance Manual Part 1
(supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains information on the periodic maintenance and servicing
information necessary for the principal block and board replacement.
. Maintenance Manual Part 2
(not supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains detailed information on the maintenance and servicing and
their parts (adjustment, board layout, schematic diagram, detailed parts list and so
on).
If this manual is required, please contact to Sony’s service organization.
. Protocol Manual
(not supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains information on the protocols used for controlling the routing
switcher system.
The following manuals are available for protocols used to support.
Please contact to Sony’s service organization to obtain a copy of the manual.
S-BUS PROTOCOL AND COMMAND SPECIFICATIONS
(S-BUS remote terminal control protocol)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM PROTOCOL AND SPECIFICATIONS
(Sony cart protocol)
. DVS-V3232B/V6464B Series Technical Manual*1
(not supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains technical outlines of a digital routing switcher system
primary consisting of DVS-V3232B/V6464B information items.
If this manual is required, please contact to Sony’s service organization.
*1 : Common with DVS-V3232M/V6464M.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) DVS-V1616/A3232/RS1616/TC3232, BVS-V3232/A3232, BKS-R1607/
R1608/R3209/R3210
. Operation Manual (supplied with each unit)
This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions of each unit.
. Maintenance Manual (supplied with each unit)
This manual contains information on the installation, maintenance, and servicing
of the unit and its parts (replacement, block diagram, adjustment, board layout,
schematic diagram, detailed parts list and so on).
(3) BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203/R3204/R3205/R3206
. Operation and Maintenance Manual (supplied with each unit)
This manual contains information on the proper operation and application of the
unit, installation, maintenance, and servicing of the unit and its parts (replace-
ment, block diagram, adjustment, board layout, schematic diagram, detailed parts
list and so on).
(4) BKPF-R70/R70A, BKPF-300/301/350/351
. Operation Manual (supplied with each unit)
This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions of each unit.
. Installation Manual (supplied with each unit)
This manual contains information on setting up the hardware when installing each
unit.
. Maintenance Manual (not supplied with each unit)
This manual contains detailed information on the maintenance and servicing of the
unit and their parts (block diagram, adjustment, board layout, schematic diagram,
detailed part list and so on).
(5) HDS-V3232
. Operation Manual (supplied with the HDS-V3232)
This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions of each unit.
. Maintenance Manual Part 1 (supplied with the HDS-V3232)
This manual contains information on the periodic maintenance of HDS-V3232 and
servicing information necessary for the principal block and board replacement.
. Maintenance Manual Part 2 (not supplied with the HDS-V3232)
This manual contains detailed information on the maintenance and servicing of
HDS-V3232 and their parts (board layout, schematic diagram, detailed part list
and so on).
If this manual is required, please contact to Sony’s service organization.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) HDS-X3400/X3600/X3700
. Maintenance Manual Part 1 (supplied with HDS-X3000 series)
This manual describes how to install and maintain the HDS-X3000 series, and
contains information on primary services (how to replace the main blocks and
boards, and other information).
. Maintenance Manual Part 2 (available on request)
This manual describes the information that premises the service board parts
replacement (board layouts, schematic diagrams and detailed parts list) of the
HDS-X3000 series.
If this manual is required, please contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service
Center.
(7) BKS-R3216/R1617/R3219
. Operation Manual (supplied with each unit)
This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions of each unit.
. Maintenance Manual (available on request)
This manual contains information on the maintenance and servicing of the unit
and its parts (replacement, block diagram, adjustment, board layout, schematic
diagram, detailed parts list and so on).
DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series and DVS-V3232M/V6464M
Because functions are added and specifications are changed in the DVS-128, there
are several descriptions in section 1 to section 6 of this manual that do not agree
with the DVS-128. Refer to “Change information on DVS-128/HDS-X3000 series
and DVS-V3232M/V6464M” that is described in section 7 for the concrete change
information of the DVS-128.
For the contents of the DVS-V3232M/V6464M other than what are described above,
please read the “DVS-V3232B/V6464B” for “DVS-V3232M/V6464M”.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1
System Overview
1-1. Digital Routing Switcher System
The system consists of the following units.
. Routing Switcher
(DVS-V1616/V3232B/V6464B/A3232/TC3232/RS1616, BVS-V3232/A3232, HDS-V3232)
It switches signals according to the command from the remote control unit. Varied switchers are
available for different types of signals used (serial digital video, digital audio, time code, RS-422A,
etc.)
. Remote Control Unit
(BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203/R3204/R3205/R3206/R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210/R3216/R1617/R3219/
R3280/R3281)
It switches signals and displays the name of the selected signal.
. Control Terminal
It sets the configuration and operation of the router system. It monitors the system in operation and
displays the messages.
A unique control protocol called S-BUS (Sony serial bus) is used for controlling the switcher system.
With this protocol, all control signals are transmitted by using one 75 Z coaxial cable. The transmission
path is called the “S-BUS data link”. Units on the S-BUS data links transmit data through time-divided
bi-directional communication.
Other than the S-BUS, the 9-pin remote control for RS-422A can also be used for this system. But the
system will function best when the S-BUS control is used. For DVS-V3232B/V6464B and HDS-V3232,
both protocols can be used together.
With cascade connection, several sets of routing switchers of DVS-V6464B/V6464M can be connected
together to expand the input/output matrix size. The inputs and outputs of DVS-V6464M can be expand-
ed up to 1024.
To operate this system, specified settings (making of table data) must be previously carried out using the
control terminal.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-1. Digital Routing Switcher System
Software Versions
This manual is intended for systems consisting mainly of the DVS-V3232B/V6464B digital video routing
switchers and units loading the following software versions and above.
When units other than these are used, some terminal displays will be different and some functions cannot
be used. Therefore, please contact to Sony’s service organization to upgrade the version of your software.
n
Use the same version software for the same models of routing switcher or remote control units on the S-
BUS data link. If different versions are used in one system, faults may occur.
The software versions described in this manual are the following.
. Digital video routing switcher DVS-V1616
. Digital video routing switcher DVS-V3232B
. Digital video routing switcher DVS-V6464B
. Digital audio routing switcher DVS-A3232
: V3.00
: V2.10
: V2.10
: V3.00
. RS-422A remote routing switcher DVS-RS1616 : V3.01
. Time code routing switcher DVS-TC3232
. Analog video routing switcher BVS-V3232
. Analog audio routing switcher BVS-A3232
: V3.01
: V3.01
: V3.01
. HD digital video routing switcher HDS-V3232 : V2.10
. 16-source control unit BKS-R1601
. X Y control unit BKS-R3202
. X Y control unit BKS-R3210
. 32-source control unit BKS-R3203
. Universal control unit BKS-R3204
. Universal control unit BKS-R1608
. Universal control unit BKS-R3209
: V3.10
: V3.10
: V1.10
: V3.10
: V3.11
: V1.10
: V1.10
. Source and destination control unit BKS-R3205 : V3.11
. 8-destination control unit BKS-R3206
. Multi display control unit BKS-R1607
. Routing switcher controller BKS-R70
. Digital video 8x2 selector board BKPF-300
. Analog video 8x2 selector board BKPF-301
. Digital audio 8x2 selector board BKPF-350
. Analog audio 8x1 selector board BKPF-351
: V3.11
: V1.10
: V1.01
: V1.00
: V1.00
: V1.00
: V1.00
n
To install the single status display unit BKS-R3280/R3281, please refer to the operation and maintenance
manual supplied with it.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. System Control
1-2. System Control
1-2-1. Specifications and functions of control port
The DVS-V3232B/V6464B and HDS-V3232 digital video routing switcher is equipped with four kinds of
remote ports REMOTE 1 (S-BUS), REMOTE 2 (9-pin), REMOTE 3 (25-pin), and REMOTE 4 (monitor
S-BUS). Other switchers are equipped with three kinds of remote ports excluding REMOTE 4.
The specifications and functions of the control ports are as follows.
REMOTE 1 BNC 75 Z 47 kZ terminated
Protocol
S-BUS control
Data Transfer Method
Data Transfer Speed
Max Cable Length
FCS Data
BI-PHASE SPACE
312.5 kbps/1250 kbps*1
500 m/125 m*1 (BELDEN 8281 cable or equivalent)
HDLC CRC-CCIT x + x + x + 1 Initial all high
16
12
5
Function
With this port the communication between the primary and secondary stations is performed.
Remote control units, routing switchers and display units are connected to this S-BUS data
link in order to perform system functions.
REMOTE 1 is sometimes simply called “remote” for units having this remote port only.
To distinguish the S-BUS using REMOTE 1 from the monitor S-BUS (REMOTE 4), which
will be described later, it is called standard S-BUS or simply S-BUS.
REMOTE 2 D-sub 9-pin
Protocol
RS-422A Flow control, 38.4 kbps, 100 Z /10 kZ
This port accepts three kinds of protocols.
Model
Protocol
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V3232B
HDS-V3232
DVS-A3232
DVS-RS1616
DVS-TC3232
BVS-V3232
BVS-A3232
DVS-V1616
BKPF-R70
CART PROTOCOL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
AUDIO MIXER
PROTOCOL *2
Yes
PRODUCTION SWITCHER
PROTOCOL
Yes
No
No
No
Function
With this port communication between two units is performed. A switcher, DME, etc. are
connected to this port. The functions of the router system using this RS-422A port depend
on a superior controller so that the system may not have so many functions as S-BUS
system’s.
*1: The specifications of BKPF-R70. When BKPF-R70 is used, termination resistors are necessary at both ends of the cable. The cable
cannot be checked for open circuit.
*2: Known before as switcher protocol.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. System Control
REMOTE 3 D-sub 25-pin (MODEM side pin arrangement)
Protocol
RS-232C, 9600 bps*1, 8bit, No Parity, No check
Function
With this port the communication between the primary station and the control terminal and
the setting of the units are performed. It is recommended that the control terminal be always
connected to the switcher set to the primary station, so that you can see error message of
the communication circuit and operation condition of units.
Although distorted displays may be shown when a terminal with low access speed is used,
does not mean that the routing system has failed. In this case, replace the control terminal
by one with high access speed. If not, it will be necessary to guess the contents of the
display on the screen.
REMOTE 4 BNC 75 Z 47 kZ terminated
Protocol
Function
n
S-BUS control
Data Transfer Method
Data Transfer Speed
Max Cable Length
FCS Data
BI-PHASE SPACE
312.5 kbps
500 m (BELDEN 8281 cable or equivalent)
HDLC CRC-CCIT x + x + x +1 Initial all high
16
12
5
Remote port for the monitor S-BUS. It forms a S-BUS data link, different from REMOTE
1, and carries out communication between the primary and secondary stations for the
monitor system (you cannot use this connector for the standard S-BUS). The data link
consists of switchers, remote control units, display units, etc.
To control the monitor S-BUS, the optional monitor board BKDS-V3292B is required.
The protocols of REMOTE 2 are selected using the control terminal connected to REMOTE 3.
*1: The transfer speed of BKPF-R70 is 38400 bps.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. System Control
1-2-2. S-BUS control
The S-BUS control is a remote control system. It has a simple connection structure and provides highly
efficient communication. Multiple routing switchers and remote control units are connected to a single
bus line to form a control network called the S-BUS data link. The units on this S-BUS data link commu-
nicate with each other using the S-BUS protocol, select the necessary data from the control data transmit-
ted through the data link, and operate according to the data.
The routing switchers on the S-BUS data link are designated to a primary station which controls the
whole system (only one unit is set as this) and secondary stations. The primary station receives the
instructions from the secondary stations and makes adjustments for smooth communication. It also
constantly monitors the system and detects communication errors and problems. In addition to adjusting
and controlling communication, the primary station also switch crosspoints as another switcher does.
The S-BUS line is connected via the REMOTE 1 connector. Up to one line can be connected for BKPF-
300/301/350/351, two lines for DVS-V1616, three lines for DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and
HDS-V3232, and four lines for other switchers. Always terminate unused connectors with 75 Z.
Features of S-BUS control system
The main features of the S-BUS control are as follows.
. LAN type control signal communication using one 75 Z coaxial cable (S-BUS line).
. The coaxial cable can be extended to 500 m. (BELDEN 8281 cable or equivalent)
. The primary station can control up to 254 units (including the primary station)*1 of routing switchers
and remote control units using multiple S-BUS lines.
. Up to 128 units of routing switchers and remote control units can be connected to one S-BUS line.
Without stopping the system, the switchers and remote control units can be connected to the S-BUS
line or removed from it.
. The self-diagnosis results of the system can be monitored with the control terminal connected to the
primary station.
Basic configuration of S-BUS control
S-BUS control is configured as follows.
Name
Equipment
Quantity
Function
Primary station
Routing switcher (M)*2
1
Communication control in data link.
Secondary station
Remote control unit and routing
switcher (S)*3
253 max.
Use data link in the time specified
from the primary station.
Control terminal
software
Personal computer with terminal
1
Setting needed for system configuration
and displaying the status.
*1 : When one of the BKPF-300 series is set in a primary station, it can control up to 30 units (including the primary station).
*2 : It means a switcher which is set the M/S switch on CPU board to “M” position. In the case of BKPF-R70, the switch is set to “P”
position.
*3 : It means a switcher which is set the M/S switch on CPU board to “S” position.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. System Control
Example of S-BUS control system connection
: S-BUS
Control
: Signal Line
: RS-232C
Terminal
Personal computer with a
communication software or
Windows 3.1 installed *1
: T Bridge (A)
: T Bridge (B)
: 75 Z Terminator*3
: Matrix Level
Primary
Station
Level 1
REMOTE 3
Video Routing Switcher
DVS-V64646B
(M)*2
<Video>
Destination VTR
<Audio Channel 1/2>
<Audio Channel 3/4>
<Time Code>
Secondary
Station
Level 2
Level 3
Level 8
Level 4
Maximum
253 units
Audio Routing Switcher
Audio Routing Switcher
DVS-A3232
Time Code
Routing Switcher
DVS-A3232
(S)*2
(S)*2
Routing Switcher
DVS-TC3232
(S)*2
(S)*2
<Audio Channel 1/2>
<Audio channel 3/4>
Source
VTR
<Time Code>
Display Unit
BKS-R3280
Level 1
Level 1
Display Unit
BKS-R3281
Video Routing Switcher
DVS-V6464B
(S)*2
Video Routing Switcher
DVS-V3232B
(S)*2
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R1608
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R1607
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3210
Maximum
128 unit
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209
Either one of the REMOTE 1 connectors of the secondary station routing switchers can be used.
*1: The function switch will be not working in the terminal mode of the Windows 95/NT.
*2: (M) and (S) mean the setting of M/S switch on the CPU board.
*3: Connect the 75 Z terminators to the T type bridge of the last device on a S-BUS data link and to the unused REMOTE 1 connector.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. System Control
1-2-3. 9-pin remote control
The Sony digital routing switcher can be controlled from external control units connected to the RE-
MOTE 2 (D-sub 9-pin) using RS-422A. For DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232, the
functions performed by 9-pin remote control, can especially be upgraded to a great extent. The following
three kinds of 9-pin remote protocols can be used.
. Sony production switcher protocol
. Sony audio mixer protocol
. Sony cart protocol
n
The protocol that can be used depends on the models (refer to Section 1-2-1).
BKPF-R70 is controlled by Sony cart protocol only.
The DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 can be switched between the “direct mode” in
which they are controlled directly and to the “S-BUS conversion mode” in which cart protocol commands
are converted to the S-BUS protocols.
In the direct mode, the switchers can be controlled individually. In the S-BUS conversion mode, up to
254 switchers on the S-BUS line (including the primary station) can be controlled.
For DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V1616/A3232 and HDS-V3232, the S-BUS and 9-pin remote control lines
are connected to REMOTE 1 and 2 respectively and can be switched freely. Other switchers can be
connected to either control line.
m
1. In the direct mode, the protect and secret functions set on the S-BUS protocol are not avail able.
2. In the S-BUS conversion mode, the “UA2” data specified by the cart protocol will be converted to
the level values on S-BUS protocol.
In this mode, the protect and secret functions set on S-BUS protocol are available. (However, these
functions cannot be set on the 9-pin remote control and the contents of the setting cannot be checked,
either.)
3. The number of input/output signals that can be controlled on each protocol is as follows.
Protocol
Control Area
Cart Protocol*1
Cart
1-16
Cart plus
1-256
Audio mixer protocol
1-128
1-127
Production Switcher Protocol
4. When several DVS-V6464Bs are connected in a cascade and the input bus number is in creased, if
controlled by the 9-pin remote, there is the case no signal is output.
To avoid such case, use the S-BUS conversion mode.
*1 : There are two kinds of cart protocol due to the control area.
Unless otherwise noted, “cart protocol” in this manual mean the cart plus protocol.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. System Control
The following is an example of a 9-pin remote control connection.
System Console
Main Controller
Printer
(Host CPU)
Local disk
Sub Controller
(Interface Unit)
Sub Controller
(Interface Unit)
RS-422A
RS-422A
Status Display
Status Display
Status Display
Status Display
Remote Control
Unit
Remote Control
Unit
Remote Control
Unit
Remote Control
Unit
Remote Control
Unit
Remote Control
Unit
Remote Control
Unit
Remote Control
Unit
REMOTE 1
REMOTE 1
DVS-
V6464B
(S)
DVS-
V6464B
(S)
DVS-
V6464B
(S)
DVS-
V6464B
(S)
DVS-
V6464B
(S)
DVS-
V6464B
(S)
DVS-V3232B
(M)
DVS-V3232B
(M)
S-BUS
S-BUS
DVS-
V6464B
(S)
DVS-
V6464B
(S)
DVS-A3232
(S)
DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232
(S)
(S)
DVS-A3232
(S)
DVS-A3232
(S)
DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232
(S)
(S)
DVS-A3232
(S)
: S-BUS
: RS-422A
: 75 Z terminator
: Standard units making up Sony router system
(M) and (S) mean the setting of M/S switch on the CPU board.
: T bridge
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. System Control
1-2-4. Connection of control terminal
Connect the control terminal to the REMOTE3 (D-sub 25-pin) connector of the primary station as shown
below. The control terminal is used for setting of the router system and for displaying the information of
errors, problems, system status, etc. during operation.
Use the personal computer installing the terminal software as the control terminal of the router system.
DVS-V6464B
Control terminal
(IBM PC/AT compatibles)
To D-sub 9-pin
connector
To REMOTE 3
connector
RS-232C cross cable (9-pin↔ 25-pin)
n
REMOTE 3 connector of BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 is D-sub 9-pin connector.
When BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is set to the primary station, connect the control terminal to the unit by
using the RS-232C cross cable.
The control terminal is not able to connect to the system which primary station is set to BKPF-300 series.
1-2-5. Control of monitor S-BUS system
DVS-V3232B/V6464B is able to monitor all the input and output signals when the optional monitor
board BKDS-V3292B is installed, whose CPU is used exclusively for monitoring. It forms a monitor S-
BUS data link via the REMOTE4 connector.
In this manual, the monitor control line is called “monitor S-BUS” to distinguish it from the control line
of the main S-BUS using for changing crosspoints. The main S-BUS is called “standard S-BUS” or
simply “S-BUS”. Excluding the system control, the monitor S-BUS has exactly the same protocol and
communication format as that of the standard S-BUS.
The input monitor and output monitor can be either used separately or combined. They can be also
connected in cascade. As the crosspoint control of the monitor is performed separately from the standard
S-BUS control system, a primary station for the monitor S-BUS must be designated in addition to that set
for the standard S-BUS.
The configuration of the monitor S-BUS is set with the control terminal connected to the primary station
on the standard S-BUS.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. System Control
The following shows one way of connecting the monitor S-BUS system.
<S-BUS>
Secondary
Station (S)
Primary
Station (M)
B type
A type
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V6464B
(Max.
200 m)
(Inut signal)
Monitor
(Max. 200 m)
Secondary
Station (S)
Secondary
Station (S)
D type
C type
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V6464B
(Max.
200 m)
(Output/Input signal)
(Max. 200 m)
Monitor
BKS-R3209
(M) (S)
: M/S switch setting on the monitor Board.
: T Bridge (A)
BKS-R3209
BKS-R3209
BKS-R3210
: T Bridge (B)
: 75 Z Terminator
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Functions
2-1. Main Functions of Router System
1) The routing switcher is equipped with a system controller. It therefore does not require an
additional controller for controlling the routing switchers.
2) By the cascade connection, up to 512 x 512 crosspoints can be selected.
3) Up to 8 levels can be assigned.
4) Up to 254 units can be controlled in a system.
5) Each output signal can be protected so that they will not be switched by other control units.
(Protect function)
6) Each input signal can be prohibited to be selected from all the control units. (Secret function)
7) The inputs that can be selected for each output can be limited. (Crosspoint disable setting
function)
*
*
*
*
*
8) Password function
9) The either name of “Type + Number” or “Description” can be set for input/output connectors.
10) A crosspoint matrix can be mapped on a virtual matrix. (Virtual mapping function)
11) To each connector name, a different connector number can be assigned on each level.
(Free assignment function)
*
*
12) Input and output signals can be monitored using the optional monitor board BKDS-V3292B.
(Monitoring function)
13) You can enable the system to automatically select the signal lines between two routing switchers.
(Tie line function)
14) You can simultaneously switch several crosspoints. (Phantom function)
15) The control terminal connected to the primary station will display the system status informations
and error messages. (Self-diagnosis function)
16) When DVS-7000 is connected to the destination of DVS-V3232B/V6464B, the source name of
the routing switcher is indicated on the DVS-7000. (Route function)
17) BKS-R1607 and BKS-R3210 can restrict the crosspoint block of selection for each remote
control unit.
* : DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 only (BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 has no monitor function described
“12”).
DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 outstanding offers new functions as a primary
station. To get the best out of the system, we recommend that DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or
HDS-V3232 is used as a primary station.
BKPF-R70 switches the crosspoint at a highest speed in the four switchers by mounted RISC CPU.
The following outlines each function. (For details of how to set them, refer to the Section 5 “System
Settings”.)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2. Built-in Controller
2-3. Matrix Sizes
2-4. Number of Levels
2-5. Number of Units
2-2. Built-in Controller
The Sony digital routing switcher incorporates a system controller and therefore does not require a
separate external controller. When several routing switchers are connected to the S-BUS, the CPU of the
switcher set as the primary station will control the whole system.
2-3. Matrix Sizes
By the cascade connection, input and output signals can be expanded to form a large-scale of router
system.
Maximum matrix sizes depend on the kind of switchers.
. DVS-V6464B : 512 inputs x 512 outputs
. DVS-A3232 : 256 inputs x 256 outputs
. DVS-TC3232 : 256 inputs x 256 outputs
. DVS-RS1616 : 128 inputs x 128 outputs (at 16 mode)
256 inputs x 256 outputs (at 32 mode)
. BKPF-300/350 : 112 inputs x 2 outputs
. BKPF-301/351 : 32 inputs x 2 outputs (BKPF-301), 1 output (BKPF-351)
n
DVS-V1616/V3232B, HDS-V3232 and BVS-V3232/A3232 are not able to connect by the cascade.
2-4. Number of Levels
The router system has the capability to control the different types of signal at the same time. This is
enabled by the level setting.
The router system can handle the signals such as video, audio, timecode and the RS-422A remote control
signal. These signals are switched by their exclusive switchers. The signals that perform switching are
allocated in the different layers. These layers are called levels.
In the router system, the different numbers are given to the input and output signals of the respective
layers that enable switching of various signals at the different levels simultaneously.
Example: Video can be set to level 1, audio to level 2, etc.
Up to eight levels can be set for one system.
The levels are set in the menu item [E : SET LEVEL TABLE].
2-5. Number of Units
Up to 128 remote control units and switchers can be connected to one S-BUS line. It is possible to
control up to 254 units (including the primary station) in total of all lines.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6. Protect Function
2-7. Secret Function
2-8. Crosspoint Disable Setting Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
2-9. Password Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
2-6. Protect Function
Function which protects the crosspoint set so that it cannot be released using other remote control units.
While the protect function is on, the destination of the crosspoint to be protected will be fixed. Once the
protect is set, it will not be released by any command, except those from the control terminal and the
control unit used to set it. The protect function can be set and released freely from the control terminal
connected to the primary station.
The control terminal also has a password function which allows only certain users to operate the system.
The protect function can be set in the menu item [C: SET DESTINATION NAME].
2-7. Secret Function
Function which “hides” certain sources from all control units to protect the crosspoint set so that it cannot
be switched.
Unlike the protect function that limits the destinations, the secret function limits the sources to protect
them from being selected by other control units.
The secret function can be set in the menu item [D: SET SOURCE NAME].
2-8. Crosspoint Disable Setting Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B,
BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
Function that limits the sources that can be selected for each destination. It can also be used to fix the area
of crosspoints selected so that only certain sources can be selected for certain destinations. This function
can be only used when a DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is assigned as the primary
station.
This function can be set in the menu item [M: SET INHIBIT TABLE].
2-9. Password Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
The control terminal can set all configuration items of the routing switcher system. It therefore has a
password function which allows only certain users to operate it. The password can be set in the menu item
[P: CHANGE PASSWORD].
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10. Setting the Input/Output Name (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
2-10. Setting the Input/Output Name
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
The following names can be used for the input/output connectors of the routing switcher.
1. “Type+Number” name
2. ”Description“ name
There are altogether three kinds of numbers that can be set as input/output numbers. These are “physical
number”, “connector number”, and “virtual number”.
The physical number and connector number are the number of connectors attached to the switcher. For a
DVS-V6464B, it is 1 to 64. For a DVS-V3232B, it is 1 to 32. The difference between the physical
number and connector number is that the connector number is used for each switcher frame, while the
physical number is used for one router system that is either single frame or multiple cascading frames.
Usually the physical number is used for the S-BUS control system, while the connector number is used
for the RS-422A (9-pin remote) control system.
The virtual number is the numbers assigned when switchers are mapped on a virtual matrix with 512
inputs and 512 outputs. The numbers will not duplicate even if several switchers are mapped on the
virtual matrix. Unless otherwise noted, the input/output number in this manual means the virtual number.
INPUT
Virtual number
152
88
25
18
9
1
1
DVS-V1616
(LEVEL-1)
5
DVS-V1616
(LEVEL-8)
10
12
OUTPUT
Physical number
128
(64)
65 64
1
(Connector number)
(1) (64)
(1)
1
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V6464B
(64) 64
75
(Connector number)
Physical number
Virtual number
Virtual Matrix
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10. Setting the Input/Output Name (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
The name “Type + Num” consists of four alphabets and three numbers. It is assigned to the virtual
number. Sixteen kinds of letters can be set for the “Type” part. Number 1 to 999 can be used for the
“Num” part.
Examples: CAM 234, VTR 145
The name “Description” consists of any 16 characters and is assigned to the virtual number, e.g. “Tokyo”
and “Market”. Up to 1024 kinds of names can be registered. The 160 kinds of them are transmitted to the
remote control unit in order to set buttons and for displaying. The 160 names can be registered as one
group. Data of 8 groups can be registered at the primary station. The data of remote control unit can be
replaced by a group and the different data groups can be used for each remote control unit
Primary station (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, HDS-V3232)
Remote control unit
8 groups
No. 2 group
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
1 group for
each unit
No. 2 group
No. 4 group
No. 8
1group : 160 names
Description Name
The name “Description” can be selected the “DESCRIP. NAME” in the menu item [J: NAME STYLE]
when a DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is used as the primary station.
After the selection, set the description name in the menu item [C : SET DESTINATION NAME] or [D :
SET SOURCE NAME].
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-11. Virtual Mapping Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
2-11. Virtual Mapping Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
Several routing switchers can be mapped on a virtual matrix with 512 inputs and 512 outputs in router
system. The matrix of one switcher can be also divided into several virtual levels and mapped.
For example, a switcher handling the 4:2:2 video signal and a switcher handling the 4 fsc video signal can
be mapped on the same level. By connecting them using a 4:2:2/4 fsc converter, the tie line control can be
performed (refer to Section 2-14).
DVS-A3232 has two modes such as 2-channel mode and 4-channel mode. Normally, either one will be
selected. However it is possible to use the overlapping area as the 4-channel mode by dividing the matrix
into two in the 2-channel mode and assigning them to the different virtual levels.
In the figure below, the 12 x 12 area where the level 2 and level 3 is overlapping is set to the 4 -channel
mode while the other is set to the 2-channel mode in the 20 x 20 area.
DVS-A3232
(2-channel mode)
12
1
1
Mapping to LEVEL-2 (1 to 20)
LEVEL-3
32
20
12
1
(AUDIO-2)
1
20
12
1
12
1
LEVEL-2
(AUDIO-1)
12
20
12
20
32
Mapping to LEVEL-3 (1 to 12)
: 2-channel mode
: 4-channel mode
It is called “Virtual mapping” that you assign crosspoints using the virtual matrices and virtual levels in
this way.
This virtual mapping function can be set in the menu item [L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT] when a
DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is used as the primary station.
n
When the matrix of a DVS-V3232B/V6464B is divided into two or more matrices on multiple virtual
levels, the monitor function for input/output signals may not work correctly.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12. Free Assignment Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
2-12. Free Assignment Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
While the same input/output number can be assigned, through levels 1 to 8, for each input/output name,
different physical number can also be assigned on each level for an input/output name.
The following figure shows the case that DVS-V6464B is used for level 1 and DVS-A3232 for levels 2 and
3. To source IN002, physical number 5 can be assigned on level 1, physical number 2 on level 2, and
physical number 18 on level 3.
Similarly, to destination OUT004, physical number 32 can be assigned on level 1, physical number 32 on
level 2, and physical number 4 on level 3.
18
LEVEL-3
(AUDIO-2)
LEVEL-2
(AUDIO-1)
2
4
32
5
LEVEL-1
(VIDEO)
32
IN002
32
OUT004
This free assignment function can be set in the menu item [L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT] when a
DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is used as the primary station.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-13. Monitor Function (BKDS-V3292B only)
2-13. Monitor Function (BKDS-V3292B only)
If a DVS-V3232B/V6464B is equipped with the optional BKDS-V3292B, any input/output signal can be
monitored. The input and output signals can be observed on different monitors or on the same monitor by
switching channels.
By connecting the monitor signals of several switchers in cascade form, all input and output signals can be
observed on one monitor.
The crosspoints of monitor signals are controlled by the monitor S-BUS (the control line similar to the
standard S-BUS although it controls only the monitor system).
The primary station on the monitor S-BUS is independent from the primary station on the standard S-BUS.
Therefore, several monitor S-BUS can be set to one system.
For example, switchers (P-2) and (P-3) in the figure on next page serve as the primary station on the
monitor S-BUS independently, while the switcher (P-1) serves as the primary station on the standard S-
BUS and monitor S-BUS.
Input
Input
1
(Input) 128
65
64
1
Input Monitor
(Separate connection)
Output
DVS-V6464B
(B Type)
DVS-V6464B
(A Type)
64
65
Output
DVS-V6464B
(D Type)
DVS-V6464B
(C Type )
128
(Output)
Output Monitor (Separate connection)
or
Input + Output Monitor (Combined connection)
m
1. For DVS-V3232B/V6464B routing system, the primary station on the standard S-BUS and monitor S-
BUS should be the same.
However, for the monitor S-BUS which does not include the primary station on the standard S-BUS,
any switcher can be assigned the primary station.
2. BKS-R1601/R3203/R3206 cannot be used as a secondary station on the monitor S-BUS.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-13. Monitor Function (BKDS-V3292B only)
BKS-R3204
BKS-R3204
BKS-R3204
BKS-R3206
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V6464B
(P-1)
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V6464B
75 Z
Terminate
75 Z
Terminate
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V6464B
(P-2)
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V6464B
75 Z
Terminate
75 Z
Terminate
BKS-R3204
: Standard S-BUS Line
: Monitor S-BUS Line
DVS-V6464B
BKS-R3204
(P-3)
75 Z Terminate
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14. Tie Line Management (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
2-14. Tie Line Management
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
If the primary station is a DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232, by previously setting four
signal paths between routing switchers, unused signal paths can be selected automatically and protected
when input and output names are selected. This function is called tie line management. It is effective to
share the minimum number of converters (4:2:2:/4 fsc, 4 fsc/4:2:2, etc.).
For example, if both a 4:2:2 video switcher and a 4 fsc video switcher have 32 sources and destinations,
the converters can be shared using the tie line function and all sources and destinations can be handled
with the minimum number of converters.
Converter
Net group
Source group
Converter
Net group
Routing Switcher
(4 : 2 : 2)
Routing Switcher
(4 fsc)
Destination group
Setting Procedure of the Tie Line
1. Set four input/output for each source/destination*1 group.
2. Set the four cables connecting the switchers for each net groups such as “OUT * * * _ IN * * *”.
3. Set the path from the source group to the destination (the path consists of the selected group names)
*1 : Source means the input signal. Destination means the output signal.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14. Tie Line Management (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
Operation example:
1. IN023 and OUT027 are selected from the remote control unit.
2. The CPU of the primary station detects IN023 from the source group. In the example below, the
corresponding group is S002.
3. Like for IN023, the CPU also detects OUT027. The corresponding group is D002.
4. The CPU of a primary station detects the path which has the S002 and D002 groups. In the following
example, the corresponding path is “3: S002-N004-D002”.
5. As N004 will be detected as the net group to be used, the CPU selects a usable element (not protect-
ed) from the four “OUT-IN” elements set in the N004 group, and the crosspoint is switched.
In the following example, if OUT033-IN230 is usable, the path IN023→OUT033→IN230→OUT027
will be selected.
SOURCE GROUPS NET GROUPS
DESTINATION GROUPS
D001:OUT023
OUT024
S001:IN003
IN004
N001:OUT003-IN200
N002:OUT013-IN054
OUT014-IN055
OUT004-IN201
OUT005-IN202
OUT006-IN203
IN005
OUT015-IN056
OUT025
IN006
OUT016-IN057
OUT026
S002:IN010
IN015
N003:OUT023-IN007
OUT024-IN008
N004:OUT033-IN230
OUT034-IN231
OUT035-IN233
OUT036-IN234
:
D002:OUT027
OUT028
IN023
OUT025-IN009
OUT029
IN027
OUT026-IN010
OUT030
:
:
( 20 groups )
( 40 groups )
( 20 groups )
PATHS
1:S001-N001-N002-D001
2:S002-N003-D001
3:S002-N004-D002
:
( 20 paths )
2-15. Phantom Function
Several crosspoints can be switched simultaneously with just one push of a button of the remote control
unit. This is called the phantom function.
The phantom function is set using the control terminal connected to the primary station. The crosspoints
are switched by the remote control unit.
The group of crosspoints switched together is called the phantom group. Each remote control unit stores
the data of 57 crosspoints as the phantom group. In addition to the phantom function, in DVS-V3232B/
V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232, the data of 4095 crosspoints is stored in the primary station as the
other kind of phantom groups. In this manual, the registered phantoms in each remote control unit are
referred to as “local phantom”. Those registered in the primary station are referred to as “global phan-
tom”.
The global phantom function is available if a DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is used
as the primary station.
n
The BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210 have the local phantoms of the destination offset type in addition
to the ordinary local phantom, that support the various switching.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with equipment for more details.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16. Self-Diagnosis Function
2-16. Self-Diagnosis Function
The routing switcher performed self-diagnosis on the following items and displays the results on the
control terminal connected to the primary station.
O Presence of board and its sort
O Version of ROM on the control board
O Presence of backup power supply unit/backup CPU board
O Detection of fan rotation
O Display of reference signal
O Display of errors as follows
. Faulty crosspoint (hardware)
. Display of high temperature
. Display of S-BUS disconnection
. Display of required secondary station’s disconnection or fault
. Display of backup unit (control board or power supply unit)’s fault/recovery.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-17. Route Function
2-17. Route Function
One of an application of Router is to expand number of Source inputs for DVS-7000 connecting with
DVS-V6464B, show below.
Route function is to display a source input chasing from a last program out even performing 4 times Re-
entry function with DVS-7000/DME. To display the actually selected source name, you must set the
route function with the control terminal. Then when you select the crosspoint set on the route function,
the source on the switcher A is searched for and the name is displayed. For example, when a crosspoint is
switched on the switcher A in the figure below, normally IN5 appears as the source name. If the route
function has been set, the source name selected on switcher A appears.
To activate the route function, set the destination of switcher A, destination and source of switcher B, and
level. In case of the figure below, set “OUT1 : OUT2 < IN5.”
When you use the route function, switching is possible with simple setting. For example if you select a
source (IN1) for a destination (OUT1) on switcher A , the crosspoint on switcher B (IN5-OUT2) is
automatically switched.
On the other hand, when you select a source (IN1) for a destination (OUT2) on switcher A, you have to
set a phantom, IN1 : OUT1 < IN1 previously. Then IN1-OUT2 is displayed if the phantom; IN1 is
selected.
(Source of switcher A)
1
2
3
4
IN
(Destination of switcher A)
OUT1
Expanded input (Source of swithcer B)
(Destination of
IN
5
6
7
8
switcher B)
OUT2
DVS-V6464B (Level 1)
Switcher A
DVS-7000 (Level 1)
Switcher B
OUT2 controlling panel
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
Expanded input selection buttons
Selection buttons
Phantoms are set to these button.
IN1 : OUT1 < IN1
IN2 : OUT1 < IN2
IN3 : OUT1 < IN3
IN4 : OUT1 < IN4
As OUT1 is included in switching setup data,
OUT2 < IN5 is switched automatically by Route function.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18. Enhanced Restriction of Selected Block (BKS-R1607/R3210 only)
2-18. Enhanced Restriction of Selected Block (BKS-R1607/R3210 only)
If you define a certain number of outputs, you can vary a number of inputs which would not be capable
with the older panel.
This is applicable with BKS-R1607 and BKS-R3210.
Maximum 8 blocks can be defined.
Block
Selected block of input
1 to 64
Selected block of output
1 to 64
1
2
101 to 164
101 to 132
512
164
101
64
1
Block 1
(DVS-V6464B)
64
101
Block 2
(DVS-V6464B)
132
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Control Terminal
3-1. Selecting the Control Terminal
Load Windows 3.1 to an IBM PC/AT compatible machine (CPU: 80486 or a faster and more powerful
micro-processor, clock: 25 MHz or faster enough) and use it as a control terminal in the terminal mode of
Windows.
When using personal computers, codes F1 to F5 must be set to the Windows screen.
Key Name
Command
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
_
^ [ [ 17 ~
^ [ [ 18 ~
^ [ [ 19 ~
^ [ [ 20 ~
^ [ [ 21 ~
_
_
_
_
_
*
It is possible to select codes F1 to F5 by using the cursor keys or using the [Ctrl] _ [Alt] _ [F||] key
combination.
Connect the personal computer to the primary routing switcher (REMOTE 3) using the RS-232C cable.
Symbols Used in This Manual
The symbols used for the control terminal keys in this manual are as follows.
(1) All keys are enclosed in boxes. (Ex. [Ctrl], [Return])
(2) The numerical keys in the text mean keys [0] to [9].
(3) The alphabet keys in the text mean keys [A] to [Z].
(4) The cursor key in the text mean the [(], [)], [&], and [*] keys.
(5) When two keys are to be pressed together, they are joined by the “_”. (Ex. [Ctrl] _ [X])
Functions of Keys Used for Setting
Character key : Insert the character pressed where the cursor is.
[*]
[&]
: Move the cursor to the right one space.
: Move the cursor to the left one space.
[Ctrl] _ [L] : Move the cursor to the right end of the character string.
[Ctrl] _ [A] : Move the cursor to the left end of the character string.
[Ctrl] _ [X] : Erase the whole character string being input and moves the cursor to the left end.
[BS]
: Erase the character just before the cursor.
[DEL]
: Erase the character at the cursor.
[Ctrl] _ [U] : Recover the characters erased with [BS] or [DEL] where the cursor is (up to 16 charac-
ters can be restored).
[Ctrl] _ [F] : Erase the character string input and recover the original state.
[Enter]
: Fix the entered command and data (same as [Return]).
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Control Terminal Display
3-2. Control Terminal Display
The control terminal display consists of the following three types of screen.
. System status screen : It displays messages while the router system is operating.
. Menu screen :
It displays the menu for setting the router system.
. Setting screen :
It displays the setting items of each menu.
System Status Screen
Monitor S-BUS Menu
and Setting Screen
[Ctrl] - [D]
[Ctrl] - [X]
[Ctrl] - [X]
*2
*3
Menu Screen
Menu Screen
[Ctrl] - [D]
*1
*1
[Ctrl] - [E]
[Ctrl] - [E]
[Ctrl] - [E]
Setting Screen
Setting Screen
Setting of the primary station
Setting of the Secondary station
*2
Menu Screen
Menu Screen
[Ctrl] - [Z]
*1
*1
[Ctrl] - [E]
[Ctrl] - [E]
Setting Screen
Setting Screen
Setting of the secondary station on
monitor S-BUS
Setting of the primary station on
monitor S-BUS
*1 : The menu items can be selected in the following two ways.
1. Select the desirable menu item using the cursor keys, and press [Enter].
2. Press the alphabet key allocated to each menu item.
*2 : To move from the menu screen of the primary station to that of the secondary station, execute the
menu item [R: CALL SECONDARY STATION] of the primary station.
*3 : To move onto the menu of the primary station on the monitor S-BUS, execute the menu item [M:
SET MONITOR FUNCTION] of the secondary station (set as the primary station on the monitor S-
BUS).
n
Monitor function is able to work by BKDS-V3292B only.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3. System Status Screen
3-3. System Status Screen
When the primary station is turned ON, the results of the self-diagnosis and ROM check sum value are
displayed as shown below.
If the result of the self-diagnosis is satisfactory, “OK” will be displayed at the corresponding item.
However if an error has been detected, this item will be the reversal characters.
Model
Software version
SONY Digital Routing System DVS-V6464B V2.10
ITEM
ROM CHECK SUM
8A65
OK
RAM READ AND WRITE
REFERENCE SIGNAL
S-BUS LINK TERMINATE
REAL TIME CLOCK
OK
OK
STARTED
1993.02.03-22.15 STARTED BY DVS-V6464B Ver2.10 IN STATION 1
1993.02.03-22.15 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED TO CHANNEL B
1993.02.03-22.15 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
1993.02.03-22.15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 1
System Status Screen
When a message is output to the S-BUS data link, the system status screen will also show the time and
data of the event along with the message.
1990.10.12-15:42 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED
1990.10.27-09:28 STARTED BY BKS-R1601 Ver3.10 IN STATION 11
1990.11.03-05:31 STARTED BY BKS-R3204 Ver3.11 IN STATION 32
1991.01.14-13:51 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
1991.02.01-11:15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 4
1991.02.04-06:11 X-POINT ERROR IN STATION 1
Messages of the System Status
If some error or event happens while you open a Menu Screen or a Setting Screen, then the message will
be displayed when you open the system status screen.
The display will change to the menu screen when [Ctrl] _ [X] is pressed.
To return to the system status screen, press [Ctrl] _ [X] again.
n
When [Ctrl] _ [X] is pressed, the menu screen will be opened.
At this time, if the password is required, input the password.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. Menu Screen
3-4. Menu Screen
3-4-1. Menu screen of the primary station
The menu screen shows all menu items for system setting in the table data of the primary station.
By selecting the items on the menu screen using the following procedure, the screen will show the setting
screen.
n
Compared with the system status screen, router system operations take more time, when the menu screen
or the setting screen is open. Therefore, please return to the system status screen after system setting.
The following are two methods of selecting the menu items.
1. Use the cursor keys to select the desired menu item, and press [Enter]. (Some models have no this
function. In this case, perform step 2. to select.)
2. Press the alphabet key assigned to each menu item.
The screen will return to the system status screen when [Ctrl] _ [X] pressed.
Primary station menu screen of DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is as follows.
Model
Software version
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
Station address
MODIFICATION COMMAND
A: DISPLAY CONTROL AREA
C: SET DESTINATION NAME
E: SET LEVEL TABLE
B: SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
D: SET SOURCE NAME
F: SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
H: SET GLOBAL PHANTOM
K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
M: SET INHIBIT TABLE
O: SET TIE LINES
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
J: NAME STYLE(Type + Num)
L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT
N: SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP
P: CHANGE PASSWORD
Menu item
Q: CHANGE CROSSPOINT
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
MAINTENANCE COMMAND
S: SELECT INDICATION COLOR(OFF) T: SET CLOCK
U: SELECT CONTROL MODE
W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG
Y: DISPLAY TABLE DATA
V: SELECT WARNING DISPLAY (ON)
X: DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION
Z: SET UNIT DETECTABLE
Short-cut key
Ctrl-X:QUIT SETUP MENU
Menu Screen of the Primary Station (Ex. DVS-V6464B)
n
. Menu screen of BKDF-R70 does not have the menu item [S].
. Menu screen of HDS-V3232 does not have the menu item [S] and [Y].
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. Menu Screen
3-4-2. Menu screen of the secondary station
To call the menu screen of the secondary station, select menu item [R: CALL SECONDARY STATION]
in the primary station menu and input the secondary station number.
To set the secondary station function of the routing switcher used as the primary station, input “1” as the
secondary station number.
The screen will return to the menu screen of the primary station when [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed.
n
When the secondary station menu is called, the color function will become ineffective, even if [S: SE-
LECT INDICATION COLOR] has been selected to “ON”.
(1) Routing switcher
1 DVS-V1616
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
DVS-V1616 V3.00 STATION NUMBER 9
K: DEFAULT TABLE
MODIFICATION COMMAND
A: SET UNIT LOCATION
MAINTENANCE COMMAND
Y: DISPLAY TABLE
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. DVS-V1616)
2 DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 2
MODIFICATION COMMAND
A: SET UNIT LOCATION
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION
K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
U: SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL
MAINTENANCE COMMAND
Y: DISPLAY TABLE DATA
V: DISPLAY UNIT STATUS
Z: SELECT SDI FORMAT
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. DVS-V6464B)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. Menu Screen
3 DVS-RS1616/TC3232/A3232, BVS-V3232/A3232
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
DVS-RS1616 V3.01 STATION NUMBER 7
MODIFICATION COMMAND
A: SET UNIT LOCATION
K: DEFAULT TABLE
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
MAINTENANCE COMMAND
Z: SELECT CONNECTION
Y: DISPLAY TABLE
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. DVS-RS1616)
n
DVS-TC3232/A3232 and BVS-V3232/A3232 does not have menu item [Z].
4 HDS-V3232
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
HDS-V3232 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 3
MODIFICATION COMMAND
A: SET UNIT LOCATION
K: DEFAULT TABLE
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
U: SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL
MAINTENANCE COMMAND
Z: SWITCHING FIELD
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. HDS-V3232)
5 BKPF-R300/301/350/351
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SOURCE No. 0001-0008
BKPF-300 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 13
DESTINATION No: 0001 LEVEL No.: 1
SWITCHING FIELD: ASYNC SDI FORMAT: 4:2:2
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. BKPF-R300)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. Menu Screen
(2) Remote control unit
1 BKS-R3202
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3202 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 16
MODEFICATION COMMAND
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE
N: SET PANEL TABLE
O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION
L: COPY TABLE DATA
S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Remote Control Unit (Ex. BKS-R3202)
2 BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
MODEFICATION COMMAND
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE
BKS-R3206 V3.11 STATION NUMBER 18
N: SET PANEL TABLE
O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION
L: COPY TABLE DATA
Z: SET PANEL STATUS
S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Remote Control Unit (Ex. BKS-R3206)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. Menu Screen
3 BKS-R1607, BKS-R1608, BKS-R3209, BKS-R3210
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R1607 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 3
MODIFICATION COMMAND
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE
N: SET PANEL TABLE
O: SET AVAILABLE SOURCE/DESTINATION
R: SET ROUTE
L: COPY TABLE DATA
Z: SET PANEL STATUS
S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Remote Control Unit (Ex. BKS-R1607)
n
BKS-R1608/R3209 does not have the menu item [O].
4 BKS-R3216, BKS-R1617, BKS-R1618, BKS-R3219, BKS-R3220, BKS-R1621
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3216 V1.03 STATION NUMBER 2
MODIFICATION COMMAND
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE
N: SET PANEL TABLE
O: SET AVAILABLE SOURCE/DESTINATION
R: SET ROUTE
L: COPY TABLE DATA
Z: SET PANEL STATUS
Y: SET DISPLAY MODES
S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Remote Control Unit (Ex. BKS-R3216)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. Menu Screen
3-4-3. Menu screen of the primary station on monitor S-BUS
To call the menu screen of the primary station on the monitor S-BUS, select menu item [R: CALL
SECONDARY STATION] in the primary station menu on the standard S-BUS. (The switcher set as the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS.)
Next, select menu item [M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION].
n
If a switcher except the primary station on the monitor S-BUS is selected, this menu will not be displayed
even if [M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION] has been performed.
DVS-V3232B/V6464B + BKDS-V3292B (Monitor board)
SET MONITOR FUNCTION
DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10
MODIFICATION COMMAND
F: SET SCTIVE UNIT NUMBER
M: SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION ( COMBINED )
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
Menu Screen of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS (Ex. DVS-V6464B)
3-4-4. Menu screen of the secondary station on monitor S-BUS
To call the menu screen of the secondary station on the monitor S-BUS, call the primary station on the
monitor S-BUS in advance.
Select menu item [R: CALL SECONDARY STATION] and input the station number.
(1) Routing switcher
1 DVS-V3232B/V6464B + BKDS-V3292B (Monitor board)
SET MONITOR FUNCTION DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10 STATION NUMBER 8
MODIFICATION COMMAND
M: SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE INPUT=( ENABLE )OUTPUT=( ENABLE )
Ctrl-Z:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (Ex. DVS-V6464B)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. Menu Screen
(2) Remote control unit
1 BKS-R3202
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3202 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 14
MODIFICATION COMMAND
S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Ctrl-Z:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (Ex. BKS-R3202)
2 BKS-R3204, BKS-R3205
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3204 V3.11 STATION NUMBER 18
MODIFICATION COMMAND
N: SET PANEL TABLE
L: COPY TABLE DATA
Z: SET PANEL STATUS
S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Ctrl-Z:RETURN
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (Ex. BKS-R3204)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5. Setting Screen
3-5. Setting Screen
Set the items in the menu in the setting screen.
To call the setting screen, select the menu item with the cursor key or input it using the alphabet key, and
press [Enter].
(The same procedure for calling the setting screen is applied to both the primary station menu and
secondary station menu.)
The screen returns to the menu screen when [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed at each menu item.
Then if [Ctrl] _ [X] is pressed, the screen will return to the system status screen.
n
The setting screen of menu items “C“, “D”, “E”, “H”, “L”, “M”, “N”, “O”, and “Q” may differ according
to the source/destination name mode set at menu item “J”.
For the “Type + Num” mode:
. The name of the destination or source will be displayed in the form of type name and number.
. To set or change the name, select any name from the list displayed at the bottom of the screen and
then input it using the numerical keys.
For the “DESCRIP.NAME” mode:
. The name of the destination or source will be displayed in the form of the Description.
. To set or change the name, directly input it using the alphabet or numerical keys.
Unless otherwise noted, the setting screen used in this manual are that of the “Type + Num” mode.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4
Setup Procedure
4-1. Outline
This setup procedure is written for the setup operator to understand the setup procedure, and more
importantly, the philosophy behind the setup. Time spent now, before actually sitting down at the Setup
Terminal will greatly enhance the flexibility of your router system (routing switcher system). If your
system is only comprised of DVS-V**** routing switchers the setup approach is much simpler, and
pretty strait forward. But, if your router system is comprised of more the one type of routing switcher
(AES/EBU, Analog Audio, or Video, Time Code, RS-422A Remote, etc.) it is very important that you
understand what you read in this procedure before you actually start the setup procedure.
A router system with different types of routing switchers should usually be thought of as a 3 dimensional
object. We will see in this procedure that in a few cases the old 2 dimensional model of a X-Y matrix
switch will do. But, the most flexibility is obtained by thinking of each type of routing switcher as a
separate, and distinct Z layer, or level (see figure 2).
Regarding detailed setup information, refer to the menus explanation in the Installation manuals chapter
on setup.
What we will do in this procedure is to:
1. Identify all in/out signals, and segregate them into 16 types of sources and destinations.
2. Assign virtual inputs, and outputs a “Type + number” name. (numbers start at 001 and go to 512
for both source, and destinations)
3. Assign each output “Type + number” name to one or more levels.
4. Assign each “Type + number” name to an actual physical in/out location.
5. Assign any needed phantoms (also known as “salvos”).
6. Decide which control units can be active on the S-BUS, and displayed in various diagnostic
modes.
7. Decide which inputs won’t be available at selected outputs.
8. Setup any “tie lines” needed.
9. Assign second naming convention (if desired).
10. Setup individual control units on the S-BUS data link.
Regarding steps 1 through 4, these are important steps (with step 2 being the longest, and most critical).
As an introductory explanation, it should be clear that we humans like to deal in names, while the S-BUS
control system deals in numbered labels, which the primary (main routing switcher frame) will translate
into actual physical inputs, and outputs. Many facilities will base the mnemonics used in all documenta-
tion based on the limitations imposed by routing switcher names, and display windows.
For details of setting information, refer to the Section 5.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2. Preliminary Information Before Installation
4-2. Preliminary Information Before Installation
The control area of each switcher when used as the primary station is as follows.
Model
area
Input control
area
Output control
management
Level
Remarks
DVS-V6464B
DVS-A3232
DVS-RS1616
DVS-TC3232
1 to 512
1 to 512
1 to 512
1 to 512
1 to 8
Expansion possible
DVS-V3232B
DVS-V1616
BVS-V3232
BVS-A3232
BKPF-R70
1 to 8
Expansion not possible
HDS-V3232
Example : DVS-V3232B and HDS-V3232 have 32 inputs and 32 outputs. But when one of them set the
primary station, it can control up to 512 inputs and 512 outputs using the cascading secondary
stations.
. Be sure to set a station number for each routing switcher and remote control unit installed.
Refer to the manuals of each unit for how to set the station number.
. In this manual, the input signal is called source, and the output signal destination.
. When using two or more BKS-R1607, BKS-R3209 or BKS-R3210 for a mother and daughter configu-
ration (combined system), it is necessary to set DVS-V3232B /V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 as
the primary station.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3. Preparation Before Setup
4-3. Preparation Before Setup
1. Set a primary station
DVS-V6464B or DVS-V3232B is recommended as the primary station.
Set M/S switch on the CPU-149 board to “M” position*1.
Station ID automatically will equal one.
n
Set only one primary station.
If more than two are set as the primary, they will not work correctly.
2. Connect PC
Connect a IBM compatible PC with MS-DOS Ver. 6.2 to the Remote 3 on the primary, using RS-232C
cross-cable with 25-pin (male) and 9-pin (female) connectors*2.
Run terminal emulation software and communicate at 9600 bps*3.
The Terminal program associated with Windows 3.1 allows the mapping of control strings to virtual
function keys in the terminal program. Therefore, if your are using Windows 3.1 you can use it’s Termi-
nal program. Windows 95, and Windows NT have terminal emulation programs which do not have this
feature. If you are using a PC with Windows 95 or Windows NT, you must use a third party terminal
emulation program that allows control strings to be mapped to keys on the keyboard (usually the F1
through F12 function keys).
3. Turn on the power
Turn on the power of all equipment connecting on the S-BUS line.
n
Operation of the routing switcher may be unstable just after the power is turned on. Wait about one
minute of warm-up before starting the setup.
*1 : Set the P/S switch of the BKPF-R70 board to “P” position.
*2 : Use the cross-cable with 9-pin (female) and 9-pin (female) connectors for BKPF-R70.
*3 : Data transfer speed of BKPF-R70 is 38400 bps.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
1. Identify all in/out signals, and segregate them into 16 types of sources and destinations
(1) Make IN/OUT list of each routing switcher
Make input/output list of each routing switcher referring to installation, or wiring diagram or other
documentation showing router interconnection. Figure 1 shows an example of a 3 router system. It is
composed of an SDI, AES/EBU, and a Analog routing switcher.
At this time consider the mnemonics that can be assigned to each of the inputs or outputs.
The DVS series routing switcher can accept up to 16 unique, 4 letter (maximum) pre-fix names, such as
CG, VT, VTR, CAM, NET, SAT, BARS, TONE, etc.. The default mnemonics are IN for the input side,
and OUT for the output side.
n
Type Name = Mnemonics
Each pre-fix type can have 1000 items associated with it (VTR000, VTR001, ....VTR999). These 16 pre-
fixes you generate will be used on both the input, and output sides. What this means is that each input, or
output to the routing switcher will be referred to in a “Type + number” format (see the examples in the
upper right hand corner of figure 1.
The same name (such as VTR001) can be assigned to a input, and to an output of the routing switcher.
But, a unique name can only be used once per input, and output. It is important that you consider careful-
ly your naming convention now, as it will be carried throughout the rest of the setup, and will be the name
displayed on control panels, and other displays. Actual Source and Destination descriptive names are
decided later.
n
There is a second naming convention that can be used in place of the “Type + number” format.
But it is necessary to first enter names under the just mentioned format, and add the second set of names
later (they do not erase the “Type + number” set). The second approach is called Descriptive Names. It
is explained in step 9.
Example :
VIDEO ROUTER SOURCE
Generic Source Name
Connector
Router Source Name
CAMERA 1
CAMERA 2
VTR 1
17
18
1
CAM001
CAM002
VTR001
VTR002
VTR 2
2
VIDEO ROUTER DESTINATION
Generic Destination Name
Connector
Router Destination Name
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
1
2
3
4
VTR001
VTR002
VTR003
VTR004
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
IN
OUT
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
Name Types
VTR
CAM
SS
CG
SAT
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 6
VTR 7
NET
REM
STU
FS
NEWS
PTCH
DIG
MON
DAT
MIX
VTR 8
Studio A
News 1
8
9
8
9
VTR 8
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Remote 1
Network 1
News 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Network 1
Network 2
Remote 1
Remote 2
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera 3
Camera 4
Still Store 1
Still Store 2
Char Gen 1
Char Gen 2
Frame Sync 1
Frame Sync 2
Studio B
Patch
News 2
Char Gen 1
Char Gen 2
Cam Ret 1
Cam Ret 2
Cam Ret 3
Cam Ret 4
Studio A Switch
Studio A Switch
Studio A Mon
Studio B Mon
Still Store 1
Still Store 2
News 3
SDI
Routing Switcher
TEST
Studio B Switch
Studio B Switch
Frame Sync 1
Frame Sync 2
D/A #1
Patch
Patch
Patch
A/D #1
DVS-V3232B
IN
OUT
VTR 1
VTR 2
1
2
1
2
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
3
3
VTR 3
VTR 4
4
4
VTR 4
VTR 5
5
5
VTR 5
VTR 6
6
6
VTR 6
VTR 7
7
7
VTR 7
VTR 8
DAT 1
8
9
AES/EBU
Routing Switcher
8
9
VTR 8
DAT 1
DAT 2
DAT 3
A/D #1
A/D #2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DAT 2
DAT 3
D/A #1
D/A #2
Mixer 1 In 1
Mixer 1 In 2
SDI Mux In
Mixer 1 PGM
Mixer 1 Aux
SDI Demux Out
DVS-A3232
IN
OUT
VTR 1
VTR 2
1
2
1
2
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
3
3
VTR 3
VTR 4
4
4
VTR 4
VTR 5
5
5
VTR 5
VTR 6
6
6
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
Mixer 2 PGM Out
News 1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
VTR 7
VTR 8
Analog
Audio
Routing Switcher
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Remote 1
Network 1
News 1
News 2
A/D #1
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Network 1
Network 2
Remote 1
Remote 2
A/D #2
BVS-A3232
Fig. 1
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
(2) Assign Name Types (Menu Item [B])
Now select, and enter your 16 source and destination name pre-fixes.
Once again, up to 16 type names used for source/destination name are decided using 4 letters (except “;”).
Set using the menu item [B : SET SOURCE/DESTINATION TYPE].
Example : CAM, VTR, CG, DVE, MON, PGM, BLK, DAT, STL, TONE, CD, ...
If a consistent display format is desired, all name types should be the same length.
SOURCE/DEST/PHANTOM TYPE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
0=VTR 1=VCR
2=AUX 3=FLM 4=TEST 5=STU 6=CAM
7=REM
8=CG 9=NETA A=ENG B=ED
C=FS D=SS E=BARS F=PHAN
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
2. Source/Destination names (Menu Items [C] & [D])
At this point another very important decision must be made as to how your router system is organized,
programmed, and ultimately able to be used. You should take some time at this point to read, and totally
understand the implications of what this step in the setup means for future routing switcher setup, opera-
tion, and flexibility. How you approach this step will greatly determine the flexibility your system will
afford in control panel operation, and ease of system modification.
Many router systems are not only comprised of a SDI routing switcher (DVS-V**** routing switcher
frames), but additional types of routing switchers as well. If you only have DVS-V**** type SDI
routing switchers the information presented is not as critical to your operation, but should be read for
background information anyway. These additional routing switchers usually are analog audio, and/or
video routing switchers. Other possible routing switchers include AES/EBU, Analog Audio, Time Code,
and RS-422 machine control systems. These other routing switchers are usually controlled by the SDI
“primary” frame. This will be the case if you are using this guide for router system setup.
These additional types of routing switchers can be thought of as “assets” (secondary stations) to be
managed by the primary. These “assets” are additional crosspoints for switching analog video, or audio,
time code, etc. Your method for controlling these additional crosspoints are generally though control
panels attached to the S-BUS. Your mix of control panels, and the number, and type of additional, or
secondary routing switchers will determine the approach taken for “mapping” all the various crosspoints
in the primary, and secondary routing switchers.
There are two general approaches that can be taken in “mapping” crosspoints.
Although either approach can be mutually exclusive of the other, generally a mixture of the two are used.
The first approach is called “level mapping”. There are sources where the digital (video), and analog
audio or video routing switchers should naturally follow one another (VTR’s for instance). With sources
that should follow, you can use “level mapping”, with the SDI routing switcher on level 1, and the audio
analog routing switcher on level 2, etc..
Looking at figure 1, VTR001 could have:
its SDI input connected to DVS-V*** routing switcher output 1,
and its AES/EBU audio input connected to DVS-A3232 routing switcher output 1,
and its analog audio input connected to analog audio routing switcher out 1.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
Figure 2 shows that no two levels need to occupy the same size space in the X, and Y directions. As our
example in figure 1 demonstrates, level 1 could be 32 by 32 in 2 dimensional X, Y space, while levels 2,
and 3 are only 16 by 16.
Actually each level could occupy different size X, and Y space. Finally, it should be clear that Z “depth”,
is three in our case since we have 3 levels.
Levels Can occupy different size 2 dimensional space
Level 1
Level 2
Z
Y
X
Level 3
Fig. 2
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
Going back to the VTR 1 example, each of the 3 routing switcher outputs (SDI, AES/EBU, and analog
audio) could be assigned to a different level, under the VTR001 label.
Whenever destination VTR001 was selected all 3 crosspoints in the 3 different routing switchers would
switch together. This approach is often the simpler approach to implement, and understand, but it can
limit future flexibility in operation, as we will see.
Level Mapping
Level 1
Input (Sources)
Level 2
Level 3
Output
(Destinations)
Fig. 3
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
With this approach, you need the control terminal connected to the primary routing switcher, or a control
panel that allows access to individual “levels”, like the BKS-R1607, BKS-R1608, BKS-R3209 or BKS-
R3210 to control only one level of VTR001 routing.
Figure 4 shows this approach.
Level Approach
Inputs
Outputs
SDI
AES/EBU
Routing Switcher
Analog
Routing Switcher
SDI
AES/EBU
Routing Switcher
Analog
Routing Switcher
Routing Switcher
Routing Switcher
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 3
VTR 3
VTR 3
VTR 3
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 4
VTR 4
VTR 4
VTR 4
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 5
VTR 5
VTR 5
VTR 5
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 6
VTR 6
VTR 6
VTR 6
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 7
VTR 7
VTR 7
VTR 7
VTR 7
VTR 8
VTR 8
VTR 8
VTR 8
VTR 8
VTR 8
Studio A
News 1
DAT 1
DAT 2
DAT 3
A/D #1
Mixer 2 PGM Out
News 1
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Remote 1
Network 1
News 1
DAT 1
DAT 2
DAT 3
D/A #1
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Remote 1
Network 1
News 1
News 2
A/D #1
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Network 1
Network 2
Remote 1
Remote 2
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera 3
Camera 4
Still Store 1
Still Store 2
Char Gen 1
Char Gen 2
Frame Sync 1
Frame Sync 2
Studio B
Patch
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Network 1
Network 2
Remote 1
Remote 2
A/D #2
D/A #2
Mixer 1 PGM
Mixer 1 Aux
SDI Demux Out
News 2
Mixer 1 In 1
Mixer 1 In 2
SDI Mux In
Char Gen 1
Char Gen 2
Cam Ret 1
Cam Ret 2
Cam Ret 3
Cam Ret 4
Studio A Switch
Studio A Switch
Studio A Mon
Studio A Mon
Still Store 1
Still Store 2
News 3
A/D #2
Studio B Switch
Studio B Switch
Frame Sync 1
Frame Sync 2
D/A #1
Patch
Patch
Patch
A/D #1
Fig. 4
The second approach is “virtual mapping”. There are sources that don’t logically follow one another,
looking at figure 4, you can see that News 1, and DAT 2 on the source side, Satellite 1, and DAT 1 on the
destination side are just 2 of many that wouldn’t normally be switched together. In this case the approach
shown in figure 5 could be used.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
Virtual Approach
Inputs
Outputs
Source Connector
Destination Connector
Name
Physical Inputs
Physical Outputs
Name
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
Studio A
News 1
Satelite 1
Satelite 2
Network 1
Network 2
Remote 1
Remote 2
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera 3
Camera 4
Still Store 1
Still Store 2
Char Gen 1
Char Gen 2
Frame Sync 1
Frame Sync 2
Studio B
Patch
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Remote 1
Network 1
News 1
VTR 101
VTR 102
VTR 103
VTR 104
VTR 105
VTR 106
VTR 107
VTR 108
STU 111
NEWS 101
SAT 101
SAT 102
NET 101
NET 102
REM 101
REM 102
CAM 001
CAM 002
CAM 003
CAM 004
SS 001
VTR 101
VTR 102
VTR 103
VTR 104
VTR 105
VTR 106
VTR 107
VTR 108
SAT 101
SAT 102
REM 001
NET 101
NEWS 101
NEWS 102
CG 001
News 2
Char Gen 1
Char Gen 2
Cam Ret 1
Cam Ret 2
Cam Ret 3
Cam Ret 4
Studio A Switch
Studio A Switch
Studio A Mon
Studio B Mon
Still Store 1
Still Store 2
News 3
SDI
Routing
Switcher
SDI
Routing
Switcher
CG 002
CAM 001
CAM 002
CAM 003
CAM 004
STU 111
STU 112
MUN 111
MUN 121
SS 001
SS 002
CG 001
CG 002
FS 001
FS 002
SS 002
Studio B Switch
Studio B Switch
Frame Sync 1
Frame Sync 2
D/A #1
STU 121
PTCH 001
PTCH 002
PTCH 003
PTCH 004
DIG 101
VTR 201
VTR 202
VTR 203
VTR 204
VTR 205
VTR 206
VTR 207
VTR 208
DAT 001
DAT 002
DAT 003
DIG 201
DIG 202
MIX 201
MIX 202
DIG 203
VTR 301
VTR 302
VTR 303
VTR 304
VTR 305
VTR 306
VTR 307
VTR 308
MIX 201
NEWS 301
SAT 301
SAT 302
NET 301
NET 302
REM 301
REM 302
NEWS 103
STU 121
STU 122
FS 001
Patch
Patch
Patch
A/D #1
FS 002
DIG 101
VTR 201
VTR 202
VTR 203
VTR 204
VTR 205
VTR 206
VTR 207
VTR 208
DAT 001
DAT 002
DAT 003
DIG 201
DIG 202
MIX 201
MIX 202
DSP 203
VTR 301
VTR 302
VTR 303
VTR 304
VTR 305
VTR 306
VTR 307
VTR 308
SAT 301
SAT 302
REM 301
NET 301
NEWS 301
NEWS 302
DIG 301
DIG 302
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
DAT 1
DAT 2
DAT 3
A/D #1
A/D #2
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
DAT 1
DAT 2
DAT 3
D/A #1
D/A #2
Mixer 1 In 1
Mixer 1 In 2
SDI Mux In
AES/EBU
Routing
Switcher
AES/EBU
Routing
Switcher
Mixer 1 PGM
Mixer 1 Aux
SDI Demux Out
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Remote 1
Network 1
News 1
News 2
A/D #1
Analog
Routing
Switcher
Analog
Routing
Switcher
Mixer 2 PGM Out
News 1
Satelite 1
Satelite 2
Network 1
Network 2
Remote 1
Remote 2
A/D #2
Fig. 5
A pure virtual mapping approach would keep all destinations on 1 virtual level (although physically there
is still 3 levels) as figure 5 shows.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
Example : Destinations
. Satellite 1 connected to SDI routing switcher OUT 9
(SDI routing switcher given label destinations 001-032)
. DAT 1 connected to AES/EBU routing switcher OUT 9
(AES/EBU routing switcher given label destinations 033-048)
. Satellite 1 connected to Analog Audio OUT 9
(Analog audio routing switcher given label destinations 049-064)
Therefore :
SDI Satellite 1
AES/EBU
Analog Audio Satellite 1
(Sat001) ········· virtual level 1 out label 9
(DAT001) ······ virtual level 1 out label 41
(Sat003) ········· virtual level 1 out label 57
If DAT001 destination is changed on a control panel only output label 41 (AES OUT 9) changes. Good
in situations where few signals logically follow from one level to the next (DAT’s and cameras, Mics and
CG’s, Audio Mixers and Still Stores, etc.). With this approach any sources/ destinations that should
follow across multiple routing switchers would require phantoms (covered later) to implement multiple
crosspoints switched.
A combination of virtual, and level mapping combines both approaches as shown in figure 6.
Level 1
Virtural and Level Mapping
Level 2
Level 3
Fig. 6
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
With this approach sources, and destinations like the VTR’s would be level mapped together so that all 3
routing switchers switch at the same time under the VTR001, VTR002, etc. label.
But in the case of output 11, of each of the 3 routing switchers, the 1, and 3 levels (SDI, and analog audio
respectively) would be level mapped and switched together (REM001) while output 11 of level 2, which
is DAT003 would be virtually mapped off away from the other 2, so that it could be easily switched on
it’s own.
Example : Level 1, & level 3 outputs 11 are tied together under the REM001 label
Level 2, mapped out from under level 1 output 11 under the DAT003 label
If DAT003 destination is changed on a control panel only level 2 output 11 crosspoint on the AES/EBU
routing switcher changes. If REM001 destination is changed both levels 1, and 3 change. This approach
is good for a mixture of signals where routing levels follow in some instances, but not always.
n
Sources/Destinations where all associated crosspoints on all levels should follow would be mapped only
by levels. Sources/Destinations which shouldn’t follow would be mapped virtually.
Again, a pure level mapping approach is where all physical inputs 1, 2, etc are tied together on different
levels (see figure 4).
A pure level mapping approach is usually the worst approach. In our example here DAT 3, which is on
output 11 of the AES/EBU routing switcher appears as REM001 on all control, and display, panels if the
level only approach is taken.
Using the virtual/level mixture approach you will get separate video, and audio tallies (control panel push
button lit). As an example, (see figures 7, and 8) if you use the 2 entries from the virtual example above
and assign both of them to the same control panel (on different buttons), if REM001 is selected with it’s
button, the REM 1 button is tallied green. Now if DAT001 is selected with it’s button, the DAT 3 button
is tallied amber, while the REM001 button remains green. The DAT001 button will stay tallied when
other sources are selected as long as those sources are assigned to level 1, or 3, and not level 2.
When a button is selected with levels 1, and 2 active the DAT001 audio source button is turned off, as the
primary switches both levels of crosspoints.
Conversely, if REM 1 (green tally) is selected, and DAT 3 (amber tally) is selected, and another level 2
only source is selected, say DAT 2, the DAT 3 amber tally will extinguish, and the DAT 2 button will
now be tallied amber. The REM 1 green tally will remain on, unchanged.
A final note on figure 7.
This is a two dimensional drawing depicting a 3 dimensional object. Therefore the top half of the draw-
ing represents the X axis, the bottom half the Y axis, and from left to right the Z axis.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
Studio A
News 1
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Network 1
Network 2
Remote 1
Remote 2
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera 3
Camera 4
Still Store 1
Still Store 2
Char Gen 1
Char Gen 2
Frame Sync 1
Frame Sync 2
Studio B
Patch
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
VTR 001
VTR 002
VTR 003
VTR 004
VTR 005
VTR 006
VTR 007
VTR 008
STU 111
NEWS 001
SAT 001
SAT 002
NET 101
NET 102
REM 101
REM 102
CAM 001
CAM 002
CAM 003
CAM 004
SS 001
Mixer 2 PGM 0
News 1
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Network 1
Network 2
Remote 1
Remote 2
Mixed Level/
Virtual Approach
Level 3
(Analog Audio)
SS 002
CG 001
CG 002
FS 001
FS 002
STU 121
PTCH 001
PTCH 002
PTCH 003
PTCH 004
DIG 101
DAT 001
DAT 002
DAT 003
DIG 201
DIG 202
MIX 201
MIX 202
DIG 203
Level 2
(AES/EBU)
Input/Sources
Patch
Patch
Patch
A/D #1
DAT 1
DAT 2
DAT 3
A/D #1
A/D #2
Level 1 (SDI)
Mixer 1 PGM
Mixer 1 Aux
SDI Demux Out
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
Satellite 1
Satellite 2
Remote 1
Network 1
News 1
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
VTR 1
VTR 2
VTR 3
VTR 4
VTR 5
VTR 6
VTR 7
VTR 8
Satelite 1
Satelite 2
Remote 1
Network 1
News 1
News 2
VTR 001
VTR 002
VTR 003
VTR 004
VTR 005
VTR 006
VTR 007
VTR 008
SAT 001
SAT 002
REM 001
NET 001
NEWS 001
NEWS 002
CG 001
News 2
Char Gen 1
Char Gen 2
Cam Ret 1
Cam Ret 2
Cam Ret 3
Cam Ret 4
Studio A Switch
Studio A Switch
Studio A Mon
Studio B Mon
Still Store 1
Still Store 2
News 3
CG 002
CAM 001
CAM 002
CAM 003
CAM 004
STU 111
STU 112
MON 111
MON 112
SS 001
Level 3
(Analog Audio)
Level 2
(AES/EBU)
SS 002
Output/
Destinations
NEWS103
STU 121
STU 122
FS 001
Studio B Switch
Studio B Switch
Frame Sync 1
Frame Sync 2
D/A #1
FS 002
DIG 101
DAT 001
DAT 002
DAT 003
DIG 201
DIG 202
MIX 201
MIX 202
DIG 203
DIG 301
DIG 302
DAT 1
DAT 2
DAT 3
D/A #1
D/A #2
Mixer 1 In 1
Mixer 1 In 2
SDI Mux In
Level 1 (SDI)
A/D #1
A/D #2
Fig. 7
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
Now select suitable names for sources/destinations using Type name, and number and enter them in the
IN/OUT list of each routing switcher (menu item [C]).
Remember that you have to attention to the ins, and outs of routing switchers on all levels when you build
this list.
Example :
VIDEO ROUTER SOURCE
Connected to
Connector
Source Name
CAMERA-1
CAMERA-2
VTR-1
17
18
1
017=CAM001
018=CAM002
001=VTR001
002=VTR002
VTR-2
2
VIDEO ROUTER DESTINATION
Connected to
Connector
Destination Name
VTR-1
VTR-2
VTR-3
VTR-4
1
2
3
4
001=VTR001
002=VTR002
003=VTR003
004=VTR004
n
After destination (crosspoint/output) names have been set, the Protect mode may be implemented for that
destination (crosspoint can’t select another input).
After source (inputs) names have been set, the Secret mode may be implemented for the source (input not
selectable by control panels).
Both of these modes can be only be set, or disabled via the terminal.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
3. Set Level Table (Menu Item [E])
This is the step where you assign what levels you want each name or label to be assigned to. You also
assign the names of the various levels (here SDI, AES, and AUD are used).
The information entered here was derived from figure 7.
1=SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
SDI
:
2=AES
AES
AES
AES
AES
AES
AES
AES
AES
....
....
....
....
....
:
3=AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
AUD
:
4=
....
001 VTR001
002 VTR002
003 VTR003
004 VTR004
005 VTR005
006 VTR006
007 VTR007
008 VTR008
009 SAT001
010 SAT002
011 REM001
012 NET001
013 NEWS001
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
035 DIG203
036 MIX201
037 MIX202
038 DIG203
039 DIG301
040 DIG302
....
....
....
....
....
....
AES
AES
AES
AES
....
....
....
....
....
....
AUD
AUD
....
....
....
....
....
....
n
Delete levels not used so that these levels do not show on panels, or displays that use levels. The deleted
levels are displays as “ . . . .”.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
4. Physical Assignment (Menu Item [L])
Now we actually associate the labels or names to a physical routing switcher input or output. Assign the
physical source/destination number and the physical level to the virtual source/destination name and the
virtual levels using the menu item [L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT].
Again refer to figure 7.
PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE
LEVEL
VID
No. NAME
AES
AUD
4
5
6
7
001 VTR001
002 VTR002
003 VTR003
004 VTR004
005 VTR005
006 VTR006
007 VTR007
008 VTR008
009 STU111
001-1
002-1
003-1
004-1
005-1
006-1
007-1
008-1
009-1
001-2
002-2
003-2
004-2
005-2
006-2
007-2
008-2
...-.
...-.
...-.
:
001-3
002-3
003-3
004-3
005-3
006-3
007-3
008-3
009-3
010-3
011-3
:
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
:
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
:
010 NEWS001 010-1
011 SAT001
011-1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
017 CAM001
018 CAM002
017-1
018-1
:
...-.
...-.
:
...-.
...-.
:
...-.
...-.
:
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-.
...-.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
033 DAT001
034 DAT002
035 DAT003
036 DIG201
037 DIG202
038 MIX201
039 MIX202
040 DIG203
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
009-2
010-2
011-2
012-2
013-2
014-2
015-2
016-2
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
m
1. Create a similar table for the destination side (use F5 on the terminal setup menu [L] screen to toggle
between source/destination)
2. To delete an entry in menu item [L], press the [Ctrl] _ [P] .
This step can be confusing because you associate the input labels with physical routing switcher inputs,
along with output labels with physical outputs. You need to tell the primary which physical X row of
crosspoints feeding an output belong with each output name or label, along with which physical Y
column of crosspoints fed by an input belong with each input name or label. To visualize, look at figures
2, 3, or 4.
n
When BKPF-R70 is used as the primary station, all contents that have been set are cleared when
“A : /CLR-DATA/SBUS_LVG_DAT” which is supplied with BZR-10.
When number of items to set is smaller than number of items to clear, the procedure of clearing all items
once and setting all items from the very beginning is more efficient.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
Additionally, an individual routing switcher can be divided in 2, or more virtual routing switchers. This
means that one level can be made to look like 2, or more levels. In our example our 3 level routing
switcher could have the AES/EBU routing switcher split into 2 virtual levels.
Our 3 routing switcher system would now have 4 levels.
Why would you want to do this? If you have an AES/EBU routing switcher that handles 2 AES/EBU
audio programs per digital signal, but your plant uses 4 channels, this means it takes 2 AES/EBU signals
for 4 channels. As before, there would be many times that you would want to switch these together, and
many times you would not. Also, in many cases you would have only one AES/EBU audio frame.
Therefore, AES/EBU Channels 1/2 would arrive at one input while AES/EBU Channels 3/4 would arrive
at another input of the same routing switcher. You could use phantoms (step 8) to link these inputs
together when desired, or you could create 2 distinct levels for one physical routing switcher frame using
menu item [L]. One level could be known as A1/2, and the second A3/4. Entries to do this might look
like the examples below.
PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE
LEVEL
VID
No. NAME
A12
A34
4
5
6
7
001 VTR001
002 VTR002
003 VTR003
004 VTR004
005 VTR005
006 VTR006
007 VTR007
008 VTR008
001-1
002-1
003-1
004-1
005-1
006-1
007-1
008-1
001-2
002-2
003-2
004-2
005-2
006-2
007-2
008-2
016-2
017-2
018-2
019-2
020-2
021-2
022-2
023-2
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE
LEVEL
VID
No. NAME
A12
A34
4
5
6
7
001 VTR001
002 VTR002
003 VTR003
004 VTR004
005 VTR005
006 VTR006
007 VTR007
008 VTR008
001-1
002-1
003-1
004-1
005-1
006-1
007-1
008-1
001-2
003-2
005-2
007-2
009-2
011-2
013-2
015-2
002-2
004-2
006-2
008-2
010-2
012-2
014-2
016-2
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
This is a good place to point out that physical crosspoint usage does not have to
be in numerical order.
PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE
LEVEL
VID
No. NAME
A12
A34
4
5
6
7
001 VTR001
002 VTR002
003 VTR003
004 VTR004
005 VTR005
006 VTR006
007 VTR007
008 VTR008
005-1
006-1
007-1
008-1
001-1
002-1
003-1
004-1
032-2
030-2
028-2
026-2
008-2
006-2
004-2
002-2
031-2
029-2
027-2
025-2
007-2
005-2
003-2
001-2
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-. ...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
...-.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
5. Phantoms (Menu Item [H])
Now we will create any necessary phantoms. First we must define the phantom globally, and then allow
it’s usage by individual control panels. A phantom allows you to have a number of outputs select new
inputs all at once.
An instance of a global in our example would be the selection of input SAT001 (SDI level and the Analog
audio level) to output VTR001, and DIG201 (AES level) to output VTR001. We could call this phantom
SAT999. It’s entry as a global phantom would look like this
(1) In the top of menu item [H] we would assign our name to a numbered label:
0001 SAT999
0005 ......
0002 ......
0006 ......
0003 ......
0007 ......
0004 ......
0007 ......
(2) Once the name is assigned we are in an edit menu, where we actually assign inputs to outputs:
1=SDI
2=AES
3=AUD
VTR001 < SAT001
VTR001 < DIG201
1
....
....
2
3
....
Up to 4096 crosspoint changes can be stored among the Global phantoms.
For a control panel to be able to use a global phantom, that secondary station must be called (menu item
[R]), and the name of the global phantom loaded into it’s phantom table. Up to 57 crosspoint *1 changes
can be stored among each secondary stations (control panels) phantoms.
Local phantoms may be created in each control panel. Below is an example of a local phantom residing
in a control panels phantom table :
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PHANTOM TABLE(PHANTOM:DESTINATION<SOURCE-LEVEL)(G.PAHNTOM NAME:NUMBER)
SAT999:0001 CAM999:CAM001<STU111 -1 CAM999:CAM002<STU111 -1
BKS-R3206 V3.11
STATION NUMBER 4
CAM999:CAM003<STU111 -1 CAM999:CAM004<STU111 -1 ......:......<...... -.
......:......<...... -. ......:......<...... -. ......:......<...... -.
......:......<...... -. ......:......<...... -. ......:......<...... -.
We can see here that our global phantom SAT999 is the first entree. The 0001 that trails SAT999 means
that this global phantom is the first entry in our global phantom table (menu item [H]). Next we can see
that locally (only at this control panel) we have defined a local phantom called CAM999. It selects the
Studio A (STU111) input, and sends it to our 4 camera return outputs (CAM001, etc.) whenever it is
selected. The “_1” means that level 1 (SDI) is switched.
SAT999, and CAM999 could be assigned to buttons on this control panel just like any other source, or
destination name could be.
*1 : Up to 64 crosspoint changes can be stored in BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210 of Ver. 1.10.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
6. Decide Remote Control Units Can Be Active on the S-BUS
(1) Available Stations (Menu Item [F])
Make secondary stations available by setting “E” on the menu item [F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER.
The stations that are enabled will be polled by the primary, for panel activity, and status updates.
ENABLE ACTIVE UNIT FOR STATION NUMBER
DVS-V3232B V2.10
STATION NUMBER 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M E E E E E E E
001-020
021-040
n
Before this setting each secondary station has to have its ID set using the dip-switch on the back of the
control panel. The primary station has ID=1, secondary stations should have ID=2 or later.
For your reference, ID-00 is the test number, and ID-255 is the global number. Be noted that both of
them cannot be used.
(2) Detection of Stations (Menu Item [Z])
If you set “?” to a ID location in the menu item [Z], the primary station will display the corresponding
model code of that location and display a warning if communication is interrupted.
SET UNIT DETECTABLE
DVS-V3232B V2.10
STATION NUMBER 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M 03?1504 ? ? ?
001-020
021-040
01:DVS-V1616
06:BKS-R3203
02:DVS-V3232
07:BKS-R3281
03:DVS-A3232
08:DVS-V6464
13:BKS-R3204
04:BKS-R1601
09:BKS-R5000
14:BKS-R3205
05:BKS-R3202
10:DVS-RS1616
15:BKS-R3206
11:DVS-TC3232 12:BKDM-5080
16:BKS-R3280 17:BZR-1000
18:DVS-V3232B 19:DVS-V6464B 20:BKDS-7700
m
1. This menu is used with BZR-10 to select the secondary stations for saving the data. BZR-10 uploads
the data of the secondary stations only selected with the “?” mark.
2. BZR-1000 software can not be used when “?” mark is set on in this menu on secondary stations using
this menu. Continuous “System Event Has Occurred” error messages will be displayed in the BZR-
1000 GUI if “?” is set for any secondary stations.
3. Once a “?” is entered you must exit, and re-enter this menu to see the communications result.
The model code is displayed in “?”.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
7. Inhibit Crosspoint Table (Menu Item [M])
Set invalid crosspoint table for the specified crosspoints that will not be allowed to be selected by various
outputs INHIBIT TABLE on the primary station.
On the table “X” means valid crosspoint, and “_” means invalid crosspoint.
SET INHIBIT TABLE
DEST. SOURCE
DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
001
01--08 09--16 17--24 25--32 33--40 41--48 49--56
VTR001 -X-XXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
VTR002 XXX-XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
VTR003 XXXX-XXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
VTR004 XXXXX-XX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
Be careful that destination cannot select a source which makes up a loop in which the destination be-
comes the signal generating source in order to avoid potential operational mistake.
In the example here the output VTR001 can not select input 1 (VTR001), etc.
8. Tie Line Management (Menu Items [N] & [O])
This comes into play mainly if you have different types of serial digital data. Such as having both 4fsc,
and 4:2:2 signal streams in the same routing switcher level. By using the menu item [R : CALL SEC-
ONDARY STATION] you can have the primary call itself, and configure the primary to handle either
standard in groups of 8 inputs, and outputs. The same can be done be calling secondary stations on the
same level.
If you have both types of signal you probably need to convert from one standard to the other often. To
prevent the need to have many converters, you can set up the system recursively re-route serial data of
one type back into the routing switcher with a limited number of converters between routing switcher out
and routing switcher in. (See figure 8.)
4:2:2 Inputs
4fsc Inputs
4:2:2 Outputs
4:2:2 to 4fsc
Converter
4:2:2 Outputs
SDI Router
with both
4:2:2 & 4fsc
4fsc to 4:2:2
Converter
4fsc Outputs
4fsc Outputs
Fig. 8
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
Instead of one large routing switcher, there are often 2 separate routing switchers. One handling 4:2:2,
and the other 4fsc. The output of the 4:2:2 would cascade through the 4:2:2 to 4fsc converters, and on to
the inputs of the 4fsc routing switcher. The opposite configuration would be set up for going from 4fsc to
4:2:2.
What is done here is that groups of inputs are combined in a Source Name group, along with groups of
outputs known as Destination Name groups. Net (Path) Groups are then created, each one being a list of
routing switcher outs to routing switcher in’s to be used.
When a input in a source group is selected, or an output in a destination group, the routing switcher looks
at successive paths (their order as entered in each path group) until it finds an unused one.
n
Each Source, Destination, and Net group can have up to 4 entries in it.
There can be a total of 20 Source, and 20 Destination groups.
There can be up to 40 Net groups.
Each Source and Destination group are tied together by 1 Net group.
Up to 3 routing switchers, or 2 recursive paths into 1 routing switcher can be supported.
Source Group
S001:IN003
:IN004
Net Group
Destination Group
D001:OUT033
:OUT034
N001:OUT003-IN041
:OUT004-IN042
:OUT005-IN043
:OUT006-IN044
:IN005
:OUT035
:IN006
:OUT036
S002:IN010
:IN015
N002:OUT023-IN051
:OUT024-IN052
:OUT025-IN053
:OUT026-IN054
D002:OUT056
:OUT057
:IN023
:OUT058
:IN027
:OUT059
PATHS
1:S001-N001-D001
2:S002-N002-D001
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
9. Description Name (Menu Item [J])
In addition to Type + Number names, letter names (16 letters can be displayed on the BKS-R3281, most
through only display 7) can be used.
This is called a “Description name”.
To set to Description names mode, select DESCRIP.NAME using the menu item [J : NAME STYLE].
Everytime [J] is selected in the System Setup Menu the name mode toggles between Type + Number, and
Description name modes.
After [J] has been selected for the first time, go back to menu items [C] and [D] and enter the descriptive
names, if desired.
SOURCE NUMBER TRANSCODE
DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
001=VTR001 ProgVTR
003=VTR003 BkupVTR
002=VTR002 SpotVTR
004=VTR004 Net-Dly
:
:
:
:
017=CAM001 Pete
019=CAM003 Tom
018=CAM002 Mary
019=CAM004 John
n
The description name can be used repeatedly for the sources and destinations.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
10. Control Panel Setup (Menu Item [R])
Each individual control panel is contacted, and programmed by selecting [R] in the setup menu, and then
by entering the S-BUS address of the desired panel. If the control panels are enabled in the menu item [Z
: SET UNIT DETECTABLE], this might help you identify the panels address in question. If the address
for the desired panel needs further search select the menu item [X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICA-
TIONS], and command a crosspoint change from the panel in question, and observe the address indicated
by the S-BUS activity.
Once the menu page of the control panel is displayed select the menu item [Z : SET PANEL STATUS].
From this sub-menu you can configure which buttons on the panel are inputs or output selects. Also
whether this panel operates alone or in conjunction with other panels are determined in this menu.
Next select the menu item [N : SET PANEL TABLE]. Using this sub-menu you assign input/output
labels, or phantoms to the appropriate switches. (This setting is not necessary in the case of X-Y control.)
If the panel being programmed is a BKS-R3202, or a BKS-R3206 select the menu item [O : SET AVAIL-
ABLE DESTINATION]. On BKS-R3202 and BKS-R3206 all sources and destinations can be selected.
To limit potential operational mistakes destinations which may be controlled can be filtered.
In BKS-R3210 and BKS-R1607, a setting which limits arbitrary selection of sources is possible using
[Ctrl] _ [F].
When there are several control panels with similar, or identical setups you can use the menu item [L :
COPY TABLE DATA] to copy setup data from one control panel to another.
n
Use menu item [L : COPY TABLE DATA] from the panel you will copy data to!
Once you have copied the setup to a new panel you can edit that panels settings through the sub-menus as
before.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-5. Flowchart of Setup
4-5. Flowchart of Setup
Modification
Initial Setting
Primary Station Setting
DVS-V3232/FV6464B : Set S3 to "D" (Default) position on the CPU-149 board, then return
S3 to "0" position.
HDS-V3232
: Set S2 to "D" (Default) position on the CPU-251 board, then return
S2 to "0" position.
K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
U: SELECT CONTROL MODE
P: CHANGE PASSWORD
T: SET CLOCK
V: SELECT WARNING DISPLAY
B: SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
J: NAME STYLE
C: SET DESTINATION NAME
D: SET SOURCE NAME
E: SET LEVEL TABLE
F: SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT
H: SET GLOBAL PHANTOM
M: SET INHIBIT TABLE
When Description Name
N: SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP
When ' Type + Num ' Name
O: SET TIE LINES
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
Secondary Station Setting (Switcher)
K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
Secondary Station Setting (Remote Control Unit)
L: COPY TABLE DATA
U:SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL
A: SET UNIT LOCATION
Z: SET PANEL STATUS
N: SET PANEL TABLE
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION
O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE
End
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6. Setting Up BKPF-300/301/350/351
4-6. Setting Up BKPF-300/301/350/351
1. Set the switch S1-3 on BKPF-300/301/350/351 to “OFF (TERMINAL)” position.
2. Select the menu item [R: CALL SECONDARY STATION] from the menu screen of primary station,
and call BKPF-300/301/350/351.
The following screen appears.
Model name
Software version indication
Station address value
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKPF-300 VX.XX STATION NUMBER XXX
SOURCE No: 0001 - 0008
SWITCHING FIELD: ASYNC
DESTINASTION No: 0001
SDI FORMAT: 4:2:2
LEVEL No: 1
3
2
1
4
5
Ctrl-D : RETURN
Ctrl-E : RETURN TO MENU
(Example of BKPF-300)
1 SOURCE LOCATION of equipment. Input range is set here.
2 DESTINATION LOCATION of equipment. Output range is set here.
3 LEVEL of equipment is set here.
4 The MATRIX switching timing is set here. (Select either ASYNC or FIELD.)
5 The SDI format is set here. (Available in BKPF-300 only.)
(Select a type from three formats of 4: 2: 2, 4fsc NTSC or 4fsc PAL.)
3. Set the above described items from 1 to 5.
(1) Set the items from 1 to 3 as follows. Select an area to modify using the cursor key. Enter any
desired value using the numeric keys on the control terminal.
(2) Set the items 4 and 5 as follows. Select an area to modify using the cursor key, and press
[Enter].
Every pressing of [Enter] increments the preset values in order.
4. Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to return to the menu screen of primary station from the setting screen.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
System Settings
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
A: DISPLAY CONTROL AREA
A: DISPLAY UNIT LOCATION
Purpose
The menu items [A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA] and
[A : DISPLAY UNIT LOCATION] are used to check the
source and destination area of the whole routing system to
be controlled by the primary station.
Checking Procedure
1. Select menu item [A].
2. Control area is displayed as shown below.
Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen.
DISPLAY CONTROL AREA
SOURCE No 0001-0512
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
DESTINATION No 0001-0512
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
The following table lists the control area and setting area
for each model.
Model
Control Area
Mapping Area
Input control Output control Setting area
area
area
DVS-RS1616 1 to 512
1 to 512
1 to 512
1 to 128
1 to 256
DVS-TC3232 1 to 512
BVS-V3232
BVS-A3232
DVS-V1616 1 to 512
DVS-V3232B
DVS-V6464B
DVS-A3232
1 to 512
1 to 512
BKPF-R70
HDS-V3232
n
The control area of the menu item [A] means the control
area of the whole routing system, and not the input/output
area of the primary station.
To set the source/destination location of the primary
station, call the secondary station menu screen by selecting
menu item [R] and type the station number [1], and then
select the menu item [A] of the secondary station.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
B: SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
C: SET DESTINATION NAME
Purpose
Purpose
This menu is used to set the type name of the source
destination and global phantom table.
The menu makes the management of source/destination
easier.
This menu is used to set the destination name and protect
function of each output.
A number between 001 to 999 and a type name set at the
menu item [B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE] can be set to
each destination. Description name can be set by chang-
ing the name mode at the menu item [J : NAME STYLE].
For details of setting the name, refer to [J] in the menu.
The protect function (to protect the output signal from
being controlled from the remote control unit) prevents the
source signal selected for the specified destination from
being switched by other remote control units.
(During recording and ON AIR, interrupting operations
can be prevented.)
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [B].
2. Use the cursor or alphabet/numerical keys and select
the codes for the type name to be registered from the
sixteen character codes (0 to 9 and A to F) displayed
on the screen.
3. When [Ctrl] _ [P] is pressed, the setting of the type
name will be canceled, and “ · · · · ” will be displayed.
4. When [Enter] is pressed, the type name can be set. If
[Enter] is pressed again before entering the type
name, the registration will be deleted and the cursor
moves to the next position.
5. Use the alphabet and numerical keys to enter the type
name (within four letters).
6. When [Enter] is pressed, the type name will be set
and the cursor moves to the next position.
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the
original type name will be returned.
Setting Procedure (Destination Name)
1. Select menu item [C].
2. Press the cursor keys or the function keys to select the
destination number.
3. When [Ctrl] _ [P] is pressed, the set destination name
will be deleted and “ · · · · ” will be displayed.
4. When [Enter] is pressed, the destination name can be
typed.
If [Enter] is pressed again before entering a name, the
registration will be deleted and the cursor moves to the
next position.
7. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.
5. Select the code assigned to each type name, and use
the numerical keys to enter the destination name.
6. When [Enter] is pressed, the destination name will be
set and the cursor moves to the next position.
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the
original destination name will be returned.
7. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.
SOURCE/DEST/PHANTOM TYPE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
0=VTR 1=VCR
2=AUX 3=FLM 4=TEST 5=STU 6=CAM
7=REM
8=CG 9=NETA A=ENG B=ED
C=FS D=SS E=BARS F=PHAN
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
n
Operating Function Keys
1. The same destination name cannot be registered at
more than two destinations. If this is done, an error
message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Example: “VTR001 is used already; Ignored”
destination name
[F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired
destination name)
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST.
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired destination name.
2. When the Description name mode is selected at menu
item [J], both Description name and “Type + number”
name will be displayed.
n
In this menu, Description name is used for setting.
When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
functions.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME
=”will be displayed.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
entered will be searched.
Setting Procedure (Protect Function)
1. Select the destination name using the cursor, and then
press [P]. “P” is displayed after the selected destina-
tion name and the protect function is set.
Protect function cannot be set for a number whose
destination name has not been assigned.
2. To release the protect function, select the destination
name and press [P] once again.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.
m
1. If a destination name is reversed, it means the protect
function is set with a control terminal and not with a
remote control unit.
2. To change the protected destination name, release the
protection first before beginning the modification
process.
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the destination
number)
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NUMBER =” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
DESTINATION NUMBER TRANSCODE
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
001=VTR001 P
005=VTR005
009=VCR101
013=NETA001
017=.......
021=.......
025=.......
029=.......
033=.......
002=VTR002
006=VTR006
010=VCR102
014=NETA002
018=.......
022=.......
026=.......
030=.......
034=.......
003=VTR003 P
007=VTR007
011=VCR103
015=NETA003
019=.......
023=.......
027=.......
031=.......
035=.......
004=VTR004
008=VTR008
012=VCR104
016=NETA004
020=.......
024=.......
028=.......
032=.......
036=.......
[F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
0=VTR 1=VCR
2=AUX 3=FLM 4=TEST 5=STU 6=CAM
7=REM
8=CG
9=NETA A=ENG B=ED C=FS D=SS E=BARS F=PHAN
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn P:PROT. Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
D: SET SOURCE NAME
Purpose
Setting Procedure (Secret Function)
1. Select the source name using the cursor, and press [S].
“S” is displayed after the source name, and the secret
is set. Secret cannot be set for a number whose source
name has not been assigned.
2. To release the secret function, select the source name
and press [S] once again.
This menu is used to set the source name and secret
function (inhibition of source selection with a remote
control unit).
A number between 001 to 999 and a type name set at the
menu item [B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE] can be set to
each source name. Description name can be set by
changing the name mode at menu item [J : NAME
STYLE] in the menu. For details of setting the name,
refer to [J] in the menu.
When the password is required, input the password
and press [Enter]. The secret will be released.
n
The secret function is necessary when a source signal
should not be taken. When secret is set, remote control
units cannot select the source signal.
For details on password settings, refer to the menu item [P
: CHANGE PASSWORD].
SOURCE NUMBER TRANSCODE
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
001=VTR001
005=VTR005
009=AUX001 S
013=CG001
002=VTR002
003=VTR003
007=VCR101
011=CAM001 S
015=SS001
004=VTR004
008=VCR102 S
012=CAM002
016=BARS001
020=.......
024=.......
028=.......
032=.......
036=.......
Setting Procedure (Source Name)
1. Select menu item [D].
2. Press the cursor keys or the function keys, to select the
source number.
3. When [Ctrl] _ [P] is pressed, the source name will be
deleted.
006=VTR006
010=AUX002
014=NETA001
018=.......
022=.......
026=.......
030=.......
034=.......
017=.......
021=.......
025=.......
029=.......
033=.......
019=.......
023=.......
027=.......
031=.......
035=.......
0=VTR
8=CG
1=VCR
2=AUX
A=ENG
3=FLM
B=ED
4=TEST
C=FS
5=STU
D=SS
6=CAM
7=REM
4. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name can be
typed. If [Enter] is pressed before entering a name,
the registration will be deleted and the cursor moves to
the next position.
9=NETA
E=BARS F=PHAN
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn S:SECRET Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
5. Select the code assigned to each type name, and use
the numerical keys to enter the source name.
6. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name will be set
and the cursor moves to the next position.
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the
original source name will be returned.
7. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.
n
1. The same name cannot be given to assigned to two or
more sources. If this is done, an error message will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Example: “VTR001 is used already; Ignored”
source name
2. When the Description name is selected at menu item
[J], the screen will display the Description name in
addition to the “Type + Number” name.
In this menu, the Description name is used for settings.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
Operating Function Keys
[F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired source
name)
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input SOURCE
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the source name to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired source name.
n
When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
functions.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input * * * *
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
entered will be searched.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the source number)
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input SOURCE
NUMBER=” will be displayed.
2. Input the source number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
[F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
E : SET LEVEL TABLE
Purpose
Operating Function Keys
This menu is used to assign the level name and the level to
each destination name. Up to eight levels can be set.
In this menu, set only the necessary levels. If levels which
have not actually been used are set, the response of the
routing switcher system will become slower. Delete all
levels not needed.
[F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired
destination name)
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired destination name.
After setting this menu item, the selected levels can be
checked by remote control unit.
n
Setting Procedure (Setting of Level Names)
1. Select menu item [E].
2. Press the cursor keys or the function keys to select the
level number 1 to 8.
When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
functions.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the level name can be
assigned.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME =”
will be displayed.
4. Enter the level name using the alphabet and numerical
keys (within four characters).
5. When [Enter] is pressed, the level name will be set.
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the
original level name will be returned.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
entered will be searched.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.
6. When [Ctrl] _ [Z] is pressed, the level 1 to 8 will be
assigned to all destination names.
7. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
returned.
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the number of the
desired destination)
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NUMBER =”, will be displayed.
Setting Procedure (Level Setting . Release)
1. Select menu item [E].
2. Use the cursor keys to select the destination level.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the level name will be
deleted and displayed as “ · · · · ” and the level setting
will be released.
2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired destination number.
4. You can search the level with the function keys.
n
If the destination name is not set, the number of the
LEVEL TABLE
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
destination will not be displayed.
1=VID 2=A1 3=A2 4=4
VID
5=5
5
6=6
6
7=7
7
8=8
8
No. out
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
001 OUT001 VID
002 OUT002 VID
003 OUT003 VID
004 OUT004 VID
005 OUT005 VID
006 OUT006 VID
007 OUT007 VID
008 OUT008 VID
009 OUT009 VID
010 OUT010 VID
011 OUT011 VID
012 OUT012 VID
013 OUT013 VID
014 OUT014 VID
015 OUT015 VID
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0=IN
1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F=....
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
Purpose
Purpose
This menu is used to enable the units connected to the S-
BUS data link to communicate.
This menu is used to copy the table data stored in the main
CPU board of the primary station to the backup CPU
board.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [F].
This setting is valid only when the backup CPU board is
installed in the primary station.
2. Press the cursor keys to select the secondary station
whose communication will be valid.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting displayed will
change (“E” → blank → “E”). Only the secondary
stations displayed with “E” are valid. (“M” indicates
the primary station.)
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [G]. The message “This process
requires about n minutes. Execute? (y/n)” will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Ver. 2.00 : n=5
4. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.
Ver. 1.00 : n=7
2. Table data copying is performed when [Y] is pressed.
To cancel copying, press [N].
n
3. After copying, “PROGRAM TABLE? (y/n)” may be
displayed at the bottom of the screen. In this case,
press [Y].
As the response will become slower if there are many
secondary stations, make the secondary stations not
connected invalid.
“*” indicates out of the control area.
m
1. The ROM version of the main CPU board and that of
the backup CPU board must be the same. If different
versions are used, the unit may hang up due to copy-
ing. Remove the backup CPU board when this occurs.
The above occurs because a new table data can not be
run on the old version software.
2. It takes about seven minutes to copy the table data.
The copy makes other operations slow.
3. The table data of transcode from RS-422A to S-BUS
(set at the menu item [U] of a secondary station) is not
copied to the backup CPU board.
ENABLE ACTIVE UNIT FOR STATION NUMBER DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
1 2 3 4 5
+
6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 1617181920
001-020
021-040
041-060
061-080
081-100
101-120
121-140
141-160
161-180
181-200
201-220
221-240
241-254
M E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
*
*
*
*
*
*
4. When you copy the data of main CPU to backup CPU
on the menu screen [G : UPDATE BACKUP CON-
TROLLER] of the primary station or a secondary
station, you can abort the operation by pressing [Ctrl]
_ [D].
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
m
However you should copy again for the data of the
backup CPU is not correct if aborted. Even if you do
not copy again, the data will be renewed in one hour
approximately by the auto backup function.
1. Station ID of the primary station is always regardless
of the DIP switch setting on the CPU board.
2. Station ID of the secondary station is deter mined with
the DIP switch setting. Do not assign the same
number on two or more units as station ID on both
standard S-BUS and monitor S-BUS.
Number that can be registered as secondary station ID
are 2 to 254.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
H: SET GLOBAL PHANTOM
The phantom function switches several crosspoints
together with one button pushing of a remote control unit.
The crosspoints of different levels can be also switched
with this function.
Operating Function Keys
(Global Phantom Display)
[F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired global
phantom name)
There are two kinds of phantoms such as local phantom
and global phantom (refer to the menu item [H : SET
PHANTOM TABLE] of secondary stations for local
phantom).
In local phantom function, the phantom data is stored in a
remote control unit, and the phantom name is assigned
only on this remote control unit. In global phantom
function, however, the phantom data is stored in the
primary station, and it can be called by any remote control
unit. The global phantom function can be set only when
DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is
assigned as the primary station.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input PHAN-
TOM NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the global phantom name to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired name.
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired global
phantom number)
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input PHAN-
TOM NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the global phantom to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
The following describes how to set the global phantom
data in the primary station. A maximum of 4095 cross-
points can be registered.
[F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F4] : Pg Dn
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [H]. The global phantom list will be
displayed.
2. Select any global phantom number with the cursor or
function key and press [Enter]. The edit screen will
be displayed.
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.
GLOBAL PHANTOM LIST
No. NAME No. NAME
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
(4094 REMAIN)
No. NAME
No. NAME
0001 GPHA001 0002 ....... 0003 ....... 0004 .......
0005 ....... 0006 ....... 0007 ....... 0008 .......
0009 ....... 0010 ....... 0011 ....... 0012 .......
0013 ....... 0014 ....... 0015 ....... 0016 .......
0017 ....... 0018 ....... 0019 ....... 0020 .......
0021 ....... 0022 ....... 0023 ....... 0024 .......
0025 ....... 0026 ....... 0027 ....... 0028 .......
0029 ....... 0030 ....... 0031 ....... 0032 .......
0033 ....... 0034 ....... 0035 ....... 0036 .......
0037 ....... 0038 ....... 0039 ....... 0040 .......
0041 ....... 0042 ....... 0043 ....... 0044 .......
0045 ....... 0046 ....... 0047 ....... 0048 .......
0049 ....... 0050 ....... 0051 ....... 0052 .......
0053 ....... 0054 ....... 0055 ....... 0056 .......
0057 ....... 0058 ....... 0059 ....... 0060 .......
0061 ....... 0062 ....... 0063 ....... 0064 .......
0=IN
1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F=GPHA
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Global Phantom Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
3. As the cursor is placed where the name is typed, press
[Enter]. The input mode will be set.
Operating Function Keys
(Global Phantom Edit Display)
[F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to any source name
or destination name)
4. Select the codes assigned to each type name and enter
any number using the cursor. Press [Enter] key to set
it. Press [Ctrl] _ [P] to delete the phantom name.
5. Move the cursor to the place to input the destination
and press [Enter]. The input mode will be set.
6. Input the destination name with the alphabet or
numerical keys and press [Enter] to set it.
n
When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
functions.
7. Input the source name in the same way as
setting the destination name and press [Enter].
8. Set the crosspoint level. Move the cursor to
desired level and press [Enter]. The setting will be
changed.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME =”
will be displayed.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
entered will be searched.
Press [Ctrl] _ [E]. The menu will return.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.
EDIT GLOBAL PHANTOM
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
(4094 REMAIN)
0001 GPHA001
LEVEL: 1=VID 2=A1 3=A2 4=4
.... .... ....
5=5
6=6
7=7
8=8
[F2] : ADD (To add the row of crosspoints to be regis-
OUT001 <IN001 VID
OUT002 <IN002 VID
OUT003 <IN001 VID
OUT004 <IN001 VID
OUT005 <IN001 VID
OUT006 <IN001 VID
OUT007 <IN001 VID
OUT008 <IN001 VID
OUT009 <IN001 VID
OUT010 <IN001 VID
OUT011 <IN001 VID
OUT012 <IN001 VID
OUT013 <IN001 VID
OUT014 <IN001 VID
OUT015 <IN001 VID
OUT016 <IN001 VID
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
.... ....
tered as the global phantom)
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
....
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
.... .... ....
[F3] : DELETE (To delete the crosspoints)
1. Select the destination name to be deleted using
the cursor.
6
6
6
.... ....
7
7
....
8
.... .... ....
.... .... ....
.... .... ....
.... .... ....
.... .... ....
.... .... ....
.... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
.... .... .... ....
2. Press [F3].
[F4] : Dstlvl (To change the level of the crosspoint at the
cursor to the level set at the menu item [E])
1. Select the destination name to be returned to the
initial level using the cursor.
A1
.... 4
5
.... 7
8
0=IN
1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F= GPHA
F1:SEARCH F2:ADD F3:DELETE F4:DstLvl Ctrl-E:RETURN TO LAST MENU
2. Press [F4].
Example of Global Phantom Edit Screen
n
When the name mode of menu item [J] is switched, the
destination and source names displayed on the global
phantom edit screen will change.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
J : NAME STYLE
Purpose
Operating Function Keys
This menu is used to switch the name styles of the destina-
tion and source.
[F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired
destination name)
The “Type + Number” name (Type + Num) or “Descrip-
tion” name (DESCRIP. NAME) can be set.
Names on the setting screen of menu items [C], [D], [E],
[H], [L], [M], [N], [O], and [Q] are switched according to
this menu.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired destination name.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [J].
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired destina-
tion number)
2. Press the alphabet key [J] and [Enter]. The message
on the screen will change from “Type + Num” to
“DESCRIP. NAME” each time this key are pressed.
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
. Destination name setting procedure using the
Description name
3. Set menu item [J] to the Description name mode.
Ex. [J : NAME STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)]
4. Select menu item [C].
5. Move the cursor to the desired destination number.
6. When either [Enter] is pressed, the destination name
can be typed. If the Description name is set already,
delete it by [BS].
[F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
7. Enter the Description name using the alphabet keys or
the numerical keys. When [Enter] is pressed, the
Description name will be set.
[F5] : PASTE (To copy the Description name)
1. Move the cursor to the destination number to be
copied.
n
2. Press [SPACE].
Up to sixteen characters can be input. Remote control
units except BKS-R3281 will display until the seven
characters. As the first seven characters are also used to
distinguish the names, the unit may not operate properly if
the same names are assigned for the first seven characters.
3. Move the cursor to the destination number to be
pasted, and press [F5].
n
Do not assign the same name to more than one destination.
. Source name setting procedure using
Description name
DESTINATION NUMBER TRANSCODE
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
1.....7.........
DST-012
1.....7.........
3. Set menu item [J] to the Description name mode.
Example:[J : NAME STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)]
4. Select menu item [D].
5. Move the cursor to the desired source name.
6. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name can be
typed. If the Description name is set already, delete it
by [BS].
7. Enter the Description name using the alphabet or
numerical keys. When [Enter] is pressed, the De-
scription name will be set.
001=OUT001 P
003=OUT003
005=OUT005
007=OUT007
009=OUT009
011=OUT011
013=OUT013
015=OUT015
017=OUT017 P
019=OUT019
021=OUT021
023=OUT023
025=OUT025
027=OUT027
029=OUT029
031=OUT031
| 002=OUT002
| 004=OUT004 P
| 006=OUT006 P
| 008=OUT008
| 010=OUT010 P
| 012=OUT012
| 014=OUT014
| 016=OUT016
| 018=OUT018
Hong Kong
Market
Tokyo
|
|
|
London
New York
Toront
|
|
|
OUT008
Net-1
Net-2
EDIT-5
CG-B
EDIT-2
CG-A
|
|
|
News-1
Mountain
OUT020
OUT017
Washington D.C. | 020=OUT020
|
OUT021
| 022=OUT022
| 024=OUT024
| 026=OUT026
| 028=OUT028
| 030=OUT030
| 032=OUT032
|
|
OUT023
River
OUT025
OUT026
OUT028
OUT030
OUT032
|
|
|
|
OUT027
Atlantic Ocean
OUT031
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP
F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:PASTE Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Destination Name Setting Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-10
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
K: DEFAULT TABLE
L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT
Purpose
Purpose
Assign the physical numbers of the switcher to the destina-
tion numbers, source numbers and the levels of the virtual
matrix.
This menu is used to initialize the table data. Do not
perform this menu when modifying the table data.
Do not assign the same number.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [K]. The message “RESET TO
DEFAULT TABLE? (y/n)” will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
2. Initialization is performed when [Y] is pressed. To
cancel initializing, press [N].
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [L].
2. Each time [F5] is pressed, the setting screen will
change as follows.
Source number setting screen → destination number
setting screen → source number setting screen.
n
The table data will be lost when performing the menu item
[K].
. Source Number Setting Procedure
3. Select the source number setting screen.
4. Select the physical number and the level using the
cursor, and assign them to desired source number and
level on the virtual matrix. When [Enter] is pressed,
the physical assignment can be typed.
5. Enter the physical number using numerical keys, and
press [Enter].
6. Next, enter the physical level, and press [Enter] to set
it.
If press [Ctrl] _ [F] before setting, the physical
number and level will be returned to the previous
values.
If the physical number and physical level to be set has
been already used, cancel their settings first before
setting new ones.
To cancel, select the physical number and level to be
canceled, and press [Ctrl] _ [P].
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
. Destination Number Setting Procedure
Press [F5] to set the destination number setting screen.
Then, perform the same procedure as for source.
[F2] : JUMP {To move the cursor to the desired destina-
tion (source) number}
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
(SOURCE) NUMBER=” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination (source) number to be
retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
DESTINATION
No. NAME
LEVEL
A1
VID
A2
4
5
6
7
8
001 OUT001 001-1 001-2 017-3 001-4 001-5 001-6 032-7 ...-.
002 OUT002 002-1 ...-. 018-3 002-4 005-5 002-6 031-7 ...-.
003 OUT003 003-1 003-2 019-3 003-4 011-5 003-6 030-7 ...-.
004 OUT004 004-1 004-2 020-3 004-4 ...-. 004-6 ...-. ...-.
005 OUT005 005-1 005-2 ...-. 005-4 021-5 005-6 028-7 ...-.
006 OUT006 006-1 006-2 ...-. 006-4 026-5 006-6 027-7 ...-.
007 OUT007 007-1 007-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. 007-6 ...-. ...-.
008 OUT008 008-1 008-2 ...-. ...-. 036-5 008-6 025-7 ...-.
009 OUT009 009-1 009-2 ...-. ...-. 041-5 009-6 024-7 ...-.
010 OUT010 001-8 010-2 ...-. ...-. 046-5 010-6 023-7 ...-.
011 OUT011 002-8 011-2 ...-. ...-. 051-5 011-6 022-7 ...-.
012 OUT012 003-8 012-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. 012-6 021-7 ...-.
013 OUT013 004-8 013-2 ...-. ...-. 013-5 013-6 ...-. ...-.
014 OUT014 005-8 014-2 ...-. ...-. 014-5 014-6 ...-. ...-.
015 OUT015 006-8 015-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. 015-6 ...-. ...-.
016 OUT016 007-8 016-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. 016-6 017-7 ...-.
017 OUT017 008-8 ...-. ...-. ...-. 017-5 017-6 016-7 ...-.
018 OUT018 009-8 ...-. ...-. ...-. 018-5 018-6 015-7 ...-.
[F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F5] : SOURCE (DEST.)
When [F5] is pressed, the number setting screen
will change between the destination number setting
screen and source number setting screen alternately.
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:SOURCE Ctrl-P:DELETE Ctrl-E:MENU
Example of Setting Screen
m
1. The physical number is the input/output number
specified at the menu item [A : SET UNIT LOCA-
TION].
2. The virtual input/output name and the virtual level
name are assigned to the buttons on the remote control
unit.
Operating Function Keys
[F1] : SEARCH {To move the cursor to the desired
destination (source) name}
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
(SOURCE) NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination (source) name to be
retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired name.
n
When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
functions.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME
=” will be displayed.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
entered will be searched.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
M: SET INHIBIT TABLE
Purpose
Operating Function Keys
This menu is used to protect source numbers not to be
selected for each destination.
[F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired
destination name)
When the secret function is set to a source name, the
selected source cannot be output to all destinations. By
using this menu, source numbers to be inhibited can be
assigned for each destination.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired name.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [M].
n
2. Select the source number for each destination name
using the cursor. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting
will be switched.
When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
functions.
“x” : Connectable crosspoint
“_” : Unconnectable crosspoint
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME =”
will be displayed.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
entered will be searched.
SET INHIBIT TABLE
DEST. SOURCE
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
001
01--08
09--16
17--24
25--32
33--40
41--48
49--56
57--64
OUT001 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT002 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT003 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx----xx xxxx---x xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT004 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx----xx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT005 xxx-xxxx xxxxxxxx x------- -------- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxx---x
OUT006 xxxxxxxx xxx-xxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT007 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x------- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT008 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx------ xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxx-- ------xx xxxxxxxx
DEST. SOURCE
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired destina-
tion number)
009
01--08
09--16
17--24
25--32
33--40
41--48
49--56
57--64
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
OUT009 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT010 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx------ -----xxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT011 xxxxx-xx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx------ -----xxx xxxxxxxx xx--xxxx
OUT012 xxxx-xxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT013 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x---xxxx --xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT014 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x---xxxx --xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT015 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT016 xxxxxxxx xxxx--xx xxxx-xxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
F1:SEARCH
F2:JUMP
F3:LEFT
F4:RIGHT
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
[F3] : LEFT (To scroll to the next 64 sources on the left)
[F4] : RIGHT (To scroll to the next 64 sources on the
right)
Example of Setting Screen
n
The setting area for this menu is 512 x 512. Set this
function (crosspoint disable setting function) within the
size specified for the system used.
Excess crosspoints will be ignored automatically.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
N: SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP
Purpose
Operating Function Keys
To register the Description names required for each remote
control unit, set the group of Description names. Up to
eight such source and destination groups can be set.
(Up to 160 names can be registered for one group.)
The top half of the screen is for setting the group and the
bottom half displays the list of Description names.
[F1] : MOVE
(To move the cursor up and down between the
group setting screen and Description name list)
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired element
number)
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input ELE-
MENT NUMBER =” will be displayed.
2. Input the element number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [N].
2. Move the cursor to the group number by pressing [B].
3. Enter the group number using the numerical keys, and
press [Enter] to set it.
4. Press [F1] to move the cursor to the lower side of
screen.
5. Select a number and press [Enter]. The Description
name will be copied to the space of the lowest number
on the group setting screen.
[F3] : SOURCE (DEST.)
When [F3] is pressed, the Description name list
will be changed from destination to source.
[B] : GROUP
Press [B] to move the cursor to the group number
on the group setting screen.
To erase the Description names on the group setting
screen, move the cursor to the number and press [BS],
[DEL] or [Ctrl] _ [P].
[L] : COPY (To copy all data in the Description name
group to other groups)
DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
1. When [L] is pressed, the message “Please Input
Original Group Number =” will be displayed
to ask for the group number to be copied.
2. Input the group number to be copied with the
numerical keys and press [Enter]. The data of
all group will be copied to the group setting
screen currently displayed.
GROUP 1 160 REMAIN
001 .......
003 .......
005 .......
007 .......
009 .......
011 .......
013 .......
015 .......
002 .......
004 .......
006 .......
008 .......
010 .......
012 .......
014 ......
016 .......
==================================================================
[S] : SEND (Transfers all data on the group setting
screen currently displayed to a secondary station)
1. When [S] is pressed, a message “Please Input
Station Number =” will be displayed to ask for
the number of a secondary station to which the
data is to be transferred.
001=OUT001
003=OUT003
005=OUT005
007=OUT007
009=OUT009
011=OUT011
013=OUT013
015=OUT015
OUT001
OUT003
OUT005
OUT007
OUT009
OUT011
OUT013
OUT015
002=OUT002
004=OUT004
006=OUT006
008=OUT008
010=OUT010
012=OUT012
014=OUT014
016=OUT016
OUT002
OUT004
OUT006
OUT008
OUT010
OUT012
OUT014
OUT016
F1:MOVE
F2:JUMP F3:SOURCE B:Group L:Copy S:Send Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
2. Input the number of the secondary station using
the numerical keys and press [Enter].
All data on the group setting screen currently
displayed will be transferred to the secondary
station.
Example of Setting Screen
m
1. In the remote control unit, the transferred data are all
displayed as input/output numbers.
This is because data is transferred using input/output
numbers instead of input/output names.
2. The group data of the primary and secondary stations’
must be always the same.
If the primary station data is changed after transfer, be
sure to transfer the new data to the secondary station.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
. Transferring Data to the Secondary Station on
the Monitor S-BUS
To transfer the data on the group setting screen currently
displayed to a secondary station on the monitor S-BUS, the
number of the primary station on the monitor S-BUS must
be specified, in addition to the secondary station number.
Specify in the following way.
Please Input Station Number = [||||||] _ [||||||]
Station number of the
primary station on
monitor S-BUS
Station number of the
secondary station on
monitor S-BUS
. Transferring Data to All Secondary Stations
Press [A] instead of entering station numbers. The
groupsetting data currently displayed will be transferred to
all secondary stations including the monitor S-BUS.
n
If a Description name is not in a secondary station, then,
when in Description name mode, the source or destination
name will be the corresponding Type + Num. name.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
O: SET TIE LINES
Purpose
4. Input the source number using the numerical keys and
press [Enter] to set it. If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed
before the setting, the original source name will be
returned. When [Ctrl] _ [P] is pressed, the source
name will be deleted and “ · · · · ” will be displayed.
5. After setting the source group, press [F5]. The top
half of the screen will be switched to the destination
group setting screen.
This menu is used to store the connection information of the
matrix in the primary station and to set the tie line for switching
several crosspoints using the remote control unit button.
Using this method, peripheral units such as the signal
converters can be used more efficiently.
The tie line consists of four input/output connectors as one
group and paths connected between sources and destina-
tions. The tie line system consists of a maximum of 20
groups for sources and destinations respectively, and a
maximum of 40 groups for connections, called Net groups.
SET TIE LINES
SOURCE GROUPS
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
S001: 010(OUT010 ) S002: ...(.......) S003: ...(.......) S004: ...(.......)
011(OUT011 )
012(OUT012 )
013(OUT013 )
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
Setting Procedure
Before you perform the tie line management using two or
three routing switchers, you should set the unit location
and the elements of the tie line as follows.
1. Set the offset of each unit on the menu screen [A : SET
UNIT LOCATION] of the secondary station in order
to avoid repeated input/output numbers of multiple
units and locate the units on one physical level.
2. Set the elements of the tie line on the menu screen [O :
SET TIE LINE].
S005: ...(....... ) S006: ...(.......) S007: ...(.......) S008: ...(.......)
...(....... )
...(....... )
...(....... )
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
===================================================================
P01:S
P03:S
P05:S
P07:S
P09:S
P11:S
P13:S
P15:S
P17:S
P19:S
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
P02:S
P04:S
P06:S
P08:S
P10:S
P12:S
P14:S
P16:S
P18:S
P20:S
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
Select menu item [O].
The top half of the screen is for setting the source group
while the bottom half is for setting the tie line path.
F1:MOVE F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:GROUP Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Destination Group Setting Screen
SET TIE LINES
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
6. Set the destination group in the same way as for the
source group.
7. After setting the destination group, press [F5] and set
the net group setting screen.
SOURCE GROUPS
S001: ...(.......) S002: ...(.......) S003: ...(.......) S004: ...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
S005: ...(.......) S006: ...(.......) S007: ...(.......) S008: ...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
...(.......)
SET TIE LINES
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
NET GROUPS
===================================================================
N001:
LEVEL= 1
2 .... .... .... .... .... ....
P01:S
P03:S
P05:S
P07:S
P09:S
P11:S
P13:S
P15:S
P17:S
P19:S
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
P02:S
P04:S
P06:S
P08:S
P10:S
P12:S
P14:S
P16:S
P18:S
P20:S
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
-D
020(OUT020 )> 021(IN021 )
023(OUT023 )> 023(IN023 )
022(OUT022 )> 022(IN022 )
024(OUT024 )> 024(IN024 )
N002:
LEVEL= .... .... 3
4
.... .... .... ....
-N
-N
-D
025(OUT025 )> 025(IN025 )
027(OUT027 )> 027(IN027 )
026(OUT026 )> 026(IN026 )
028(OUT028 )> 028(IN028 )
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
LEVEL: 1=VID 2=A1 3=A2 4=4 5=5 6=6
7=7 8=8
===================================================================
P01:S
P03:S
P05:S
P07:S
P09:S
P11:S
P13:S
P15:S
P17:S
P19:S
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
P02:S
P04:S
P06:S
P08:S
P10:S
P12:S
P14:S
P16:S
P18:S
P20:S
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
-D
F1:MOVE F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:GROUP Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Source Group Setting Screen
3. Select a source group number using the cursor and press
[Enter]. The source number input mode will be set.
Set the source name to the desired source group.
F1:MOVE F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:GROUP Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Net Group Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
8. Select the number of net group with cursor keys and
press [Enter] to set the input mode.
Operating Function Keys
[F1] : MOVE
Set the signal path between two routing switchers,
When [F1] is pressed, the cursor will move be-
using the combination of the
tween upper and lower of the screen.
“OUT of the front stage” > “IN of the latter stage”.
9. Input the source number and the destination number
with the numerical keys and press [Enter] to set it.
When change the level, move the cursor to the level
and press [Enter].
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the group number of
the desired source)
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input
GROUP NUMBER =” will be displayed.
2. Input the group number of the source to be
retrieved.
10. Press [F1] to move the cursor to the tie line path
setting screen.
Set tie line paths using the combination of
“Source group” _ “Net group” _ “Net group” _
“Destination group”.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
The two “Net groups” can be set at a maximum.
However, leave one “Net group” blank when there are
two routing switchers to be connected.
[F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the top half of the screen will
display the 6 lines previous to the 6 lines displayed
currently.
11. Move the cursor to a path number and press [Enter].
The source group input mode will be set.
12. Input the source group number and press [Enter]. The
cursor will move to the net group. Input the net group
and destination group in the same way as for the
source group. Up to two net groups can be input for
one path.
[F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the top half of the screen will
display the 6 lines next to the 6 lines displayed
currently.
[F5] : GROUP
(To move the cursor to the top half of the screen
and press [F5]. The display will change: “Source
Gp” → “Destination Gp” → “Net Gp”.)
[F5] : DISP
13. Use the above procedure to assign the source, destina-
tion and net numbers to each path number.
(To move the cursor to the bottom half of the screen
and press [F5]. The display will change : “Path” →
“Source Name” → “Destination Name”.)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
P : CHANGE PASSWORD
Q: CHANGE CROSSPOINT
Purpose
Purpose
This menu is used to display the crosspoints and change
them.
This menu is used to change the password.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [P].
2. Input the password currently set, and press [Enter].
In the default status, password is not set in DVS-
V3232B/V6464B.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [Q].
2. Select the item using the cursor. Change only the
source name.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name input mode
will be set. When either key is pressed before entering
the source name, the mode will be canceled and the
previous display will be returned.
4. Select the code assigned to each type name, and enter
the source name using the numerical keys.
5. When [Enter] is pressed, the crosspoint will be set. If
[Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the original
setting will be returned.
Once the password is set, the menu items can not be
set or changed unless the password is entered.
If a wrong password is input, the demand for password
input will be displayed again.
3. Enter a new password, and press [Enter]. The new
password is verified again.
4. After the new password has been confirmed twice, the
screen will return to the menu screen.
When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.
5. If not confirmed, the password is demanded again.
CHANGE PASSWORD
Please Input New Password = ________________*
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
m
1. When the power of the primary station is
turned on, “ · · · · ” will be displayed for a while at the
source name position. But once the status of the cross-
points is detected, the source name set before hand will
be displayed.
Example of Setting Screen
n
2. Outputs whose destination names are not assigned will
be displayed with “ · · · · ”, and crosspoint switching
cannot be performed for these.
If you forget the password, settings cannot be performed
unless the unit is returned to default.
3. Moreover, names set with the protect function cannot
be switched either.
4. When entering the Description name, enter 7 charac-
ters from the head.
As all table data will be erased when returned to default, be
sure you should not forget the password.
CHANGE CROSSPOINT
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
LEVEL=1
DEST
SOURCE DEST
SOURCE
DEST
SOURCE
DEST
SOURCE
OUT001 -IN001
OUT005 -IN005
OUT009 -IN009
OUT013 -IN013
OUT017 -IN017
OUT021 -IN021
OUT025 -IN025
OUT029 -IN029
OUT033 -IN033
OUT037 -IN037
OUT041 -IN041
OUT045 -IN045
OUT049 -IN049
OUT053 -IN053
OUT057 -IN057
OUT061 -IN061
OUT002 -IN002
OUT006 -IN006
OUT010 -IN010
OUT014 -IN014
OUT018 -IN018
OUT022 -IN022
OUT026 -IN026
OUT030 -IN030
OUT034 -IN034
OUT038 -IN038
OUT042 -IN042
OUT046 -IN046
OUT050 -IN050
OUT054 -IN054
OUT058 -IN058
OUT062 -IN062
OUT003 -IN003
OUT007 -IN007
OUT011 -IN011
OUT015 -IN015
OUT019 -IN019
OUT023 -IN023
OUT027 -IN027
OUT031 -IN031
OUT035 -IN035
OUT039 -IN039
OUT043 -IN043
OUT047 -IN047
OUT051 -IN051
OUT055 -IN055
OUT059 -IN059
OUT063 -IN063
OUT004 -IN004
OUT008 -IN008
OUT012 -IN012
OUT016 -IN016
OUT020 -IN020
OUT024 -IN024
OUT028 -IN028
OUT032 -IN032
OUT036 -IN036
OUT040 -IN040
OUT044 -IN044
OUT048 -IN048
OUT052 -IN052
OUT056 -IN056
OUT060 -IN060
OUT064 -IN064
0=IN
1=OUT
2=.... 3=.... 4=....
5=....
D=....
6=....
E=....
7=....
F=GPHA
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=....
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:Level Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
Operating Function Keys
[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired destina-
tion number)
[F1] : SEARCH (To select a destination name)
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NAME =” will be displayed.
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NUMBER =“ will be displayed.
2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
In the Description name mode, input the
Description name (within seven characters)
from the head.
2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired destination number.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the destination name
entered will be searched.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.
[F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F5] : LEVEL
n
If there are several names whose typed characters are the
same in the Description name mode, move the cursor to the
first name displayed and press [Enter] to continue moving
the cursor to the next name.
When [F5] is pressed, a level can be selected.
Select the level number using the numerical key and
press [Enter]. If [A] is pressed instead of the
numerical key and press [Enter] here, the screen
will display a list of all levels. Thefunction keys
[F1], [F2], and [F5] on the ALL screen have the
same functions as those of the initial screen menu
item [Q].
[F1] : SEARCH (To select a source name)
In the Description name mode, the setting proce-
dure is as follows.
1. When [Enter] is pressed, the source input
mode will be set.
CHANGE CROSSPOINT
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
LEVEL=ALL
2. Input the desired Description name (within
seven characters) from the head.
LEVEL:
1=VID
No. out
2=A1
3=A2
4=4
5=5
6=6
7=7
8=8
3. Every time [F1] is pressed, the desired name
will be searched.
4. When the desired name is displayed, press
Return or Enter to set the crosspoint.
001 OUT001 IN001
002 OUT002 IN002
003 OUT003 IN003
004 OUT004 IN004
005 OUT005 IN005
006 OUT006 IN006
007 OUT007 IN007
008 OUT008 IN008
009 OUT009 IN009
010 OUT010 IN010
011 OUT011 IN011
012 OUT012 IN012
013 OUT013 IN013
014 OUT014 IN014
015 OUT015 IN015
016 OUT016 IN016
IN001
IN002
IN003
IN004
IN005
IN006
IN007
IN008
IN009
IN010
IN011
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN016
IN017
IN018
IN019
IN020
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
IN015
IN016
IN001
IN002
IN003
IN004
IN005
IN006
IN007
IN008
IN009
IN010
IN011
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN016
IN001
IN002
IN003
.....
IN005
IN006
IN007
IN008
.....
IN010
IN011
IN012
.....
IN014
IN015
IN016
IN001
IN002
IN003
IN004
IN005
IN006
IN007
IN008
IN009
IN010
IN011
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN016
IN001
IN002
IN003
.....
IN005
IN006
IN007
IN008
IN009
IN010
IN011
IN012
.....
IN014
IN015
IN016
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
0=IN
1=OUT
2=....
A=....
3=....
B=....
4=....
C=....
5=....
D=....
6=....
E=....
7=....
F=GPHA
8=....
9=....
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F5:Level
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
S : SELECT INDICATION COLOR
(Except for BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
Purpose
This menu is used to call the menu of the secondary station
connected to the S-BUS of the primary station.
Purpose
If this menu is set to “ON”, the screen will show a color
display during the use of the Sony control terminal BAC-
1200.
Operating Procedure
1. Select the menu item [R] at the menu screen.
A message will be displayed on the screen.
2. Enter the station number of the secondary station, and
press [Enter]. The display will be changed to the
menu screen of the secondary station.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [S].
2. When [S], [Enter] is pressed, the setting condition
displayed will be switched (“ON” → “OFF” → ”ON”
...).
3. If [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed, the screen will return to the
menu screen of the primary station.
n
m
As wrong characters will be displayed before and after the
menu items when a control terminal except Sony control
terminal BAC-1200 is used, be sure to set to “OFF”.
1. If the specified secondary station does not exist on the
S-BUS data link, the following message will be
displayed.
Display: “Station dose not exist”
2. If the specified secondary station is not
available for communication, the following message
will be displayed.
T : SET CLOCK
Purpose
Check at the menu item [F : SET ACTIVE UNIT
NUMBER].
Display: “Disable Station”
This menu is used for the setting of the time. The time set
at this menu will be used for recording the time of error
occurrence.
CALL STATION NUMBER ?
Setting Procedure
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
1. Select menu item [T].
2. Enter the time using the numerical keys, and press
Setting Screen
[Enter] to set it.
The screen will be changed to the menu screen
automatically.
n
If [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed without pressing [Enter], the
screen will return to the menu screen and the setting
modification becomes invalid.
1993.02.03-22:24(Y.M.D-H:M) READ TIME
CHANGE TO = 1993.02.03-22:24
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
U: SELECT REMOTE
Purpose
n
This menu is used to control the routing switcher using the
9-pin remote (REMOTE 2), and to set the control mode to
the DIRECT mode or the S-BUS conversion mode.
How to use UA2 Code:
The original use of the UA2 code in the RS-422A protocol
is to identify the multiple equipments which are connected
by loop-through connection, and be controlled.
Each equipment is controlled by the control command with
UA2 code which corresponds to the unit address of each
equipment.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [U].
2. Select channel using the cursor keys.
3. Press [Enter], and the setting condition displayed will
be changed.
The UA2 code is converted to the level control command
when the RS-422A commands are converted to the S-BUS
levels.
DIRECT → CONVERT RS422 (CART +) to S-BUS
SELECT CONTROL MODE
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
The following examples show how UA2 codes are con-
verted to the S-BUS level.
CHANNEL A --- REMOTE FUNCTION = CONVERT RS422(CART+) to S-BUS
CHANNEL B --- REMOTE FUNCTION = DIRECT
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
UA2 = 01 → 00000001 → S-BUS level 1
UA2 = 02 → 00000010 → S-BUS level 2
UA2 = 04 → 00000100 → S-BUS level 3
UA2 = 08 → 00001000 → S-BUS level 4
UA2 = 10 → 00010000 → S-BUS level 5
UA2 = 20 → 00100000 → S-BUS level 6
UA2 = 40 → 01000000 → S-BUS level 7
UA2 = 80 → 10000000 → S-BUS level 8
UA2 = FF → 11111111 → S-BUS All level
Example of Setting Screen
DIRECT:
In this mode commands received using RS-422A are not
converted to those for the S-BUS (REMOTE 1) and are
directly used for controlling the receiving station. If this
mode is selected, a protocol must be selected at the
secondary station.
The following combinations of levels are also possible.
CONVERT RS-422 (CART +) to S-BUS
This mode converts commands received using the RS-
422A to those for the S-BUS.
UA2 = 03 → 00000011 → S-BUS level 1 and 2
UA2 = 07 → 00000111 → S-BUS level 1, 2 and 3
n
The S-BUS conversion mode can be used only when the
primary station is controlled by the 9-pin remote control.
Therefore, use the DIRECT mode whenever a secondary
station is controlled by the 9-pin remote control.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
V : SELECT WARNING DISPLAY
Purpose
n
This menu is used to set the warning message displayed on
the system status screen.
Some messages will not be displayed, depending on the
models.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [V].
2. Press [V], [Enter], and the setting conditions dis-
played will be switched.(“ON” → “OFF”).
“OFF” : Displays important messages only
<Reference>
“X-POINT ERROR IN STATION * *”
“X-POINT RECOVERED IN STATION * *”
“TEMPERATURE RISE IN STATION * *”
“TEMPERATURE RECOVERED IN STATION * *”
“FAN STOP IN STATION * *”
“FAN RECOVERED IN STATION * *”
“S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED TO CHANNEL”
“S-BUS LINK CONNECTED TO CHANNEL”
“ON” : Displays all messages
Displays the following in addition to the above
<Reference>
“BACKUP POWER SUPPLY DOWN IN STATION
* *”
“BACKUP POWER SUPPLY RECOVERED IN
STATION * *”
“MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION * *”
“REFERENCE SIGNAL CORRECTLY FED TO
STATION * *”
“VALID INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD IN STA-
TION * *”
“INVALID INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD IN STA-
TION * *”
“BACKUP CPU DOWN IN STATION * *”
“BACKUP CPU RECOVERED IN STATION * *”
“STATION * * FAILURE (DISCONNECTED OR
POWER DOWN)”
“STARTED BY DVS-V6464B Ver1.00 IN STATION
* *”
“DIFFERENT CHECK SUM=35DB IN STATION * *”
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
W:SYSTEM STATUS LOG
X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION
Purpose
Purpose
This menu is used to check the error during self-diagnosis
of each station, the status of the S-BUS circuit, and the
time of events.
This menu is used to display the S-BUS data received at
the primary station.
Setting Procedure
SYSTEM STATUS LOG
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
1. Select menu item [X].
2. To stop the scroll, press [Ctrl] _ [E]. (“TRACE
OFF” will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.)
3. The menu screen will be returned when [Ctrl] _ [E] is
pressed again.
1990.10.12-15:42 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED
1990.10.27-09:28 STARTED BY BKS-R1601 Ver3.10 IN STATION 11
1990.11.03-05:31 STARTED BY BKS-R3204 Ver3.11 IN STATION 32
1991.01.14-13:51 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
1991.02.01-11:15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 4
1991.02.04-06:11 X-POINT ERROR IN STATION 1
-- end --
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
S-BUS COMMUNICATION
TRACE ON
Example of Display
STATION No.011 01 01 0B 03 0E 00 08
STATION No.015 01 09 0F 03 0E 00 08
STATION No.011 01 01 0A FF 01 00 01
STATION No.011 01 01 0F FF 01 00 01
TRACE OFF
Operation Procedure
1. Select menu item [W].
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
2. When all status cannot be displayed on the screen,
“ _ _ more _ _ ” will be displayed at the bottom of
the screen. Press [SPACE] key to display the next
status. When all status have been displayed, “_ _ end
_ _” will be displayed.
Example of Display
n
For details on the contents of the display, refer to the S-
3. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen.
BUS Protocol Manual.
System Status Screen
Refer to “6. Confirmation of Function” for detail of the
system status screen.
n
. To erase the LOG contents in DVS-V3232B/V6464B,
set the S3 switch on the CPU-149 board to “C” (Clear)
and then press the S5 switch (Reset).
After erasing, be sure to return the S3 switch to “0” and
press the S5 switch (Reset) again.
. To erase the LOG contents in HDS-V3232, set the S2
switch on the CPU-251 board to “C” (Clear) and then
press the S8 switch (Reset).
After erasing, be sure to return the S2 switch to “0” and
press the S8 switch (Reset) again.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station
Y : DISPLAY TABLE (Except for HDS-V3232)
Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE
Purpose
Purpose
This menu is used to display the table data set with the
control terminal.
This menu is used to check the possibility of communica-
tion of secondary stations connected to the S-BUS data
link periodically.
Operation Procedure
During checking, “?” appears. After the completion of
checking, the code number indicating the type of each
device appears.
If the secondary station does not communicate for a given
period, the message below appears.
1. Select menu item [Y]. The following message will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Display : “DISPLAY TABLE DATA? (y/a/n)”
2. Press [E], and the signal format (4: 2: 2/4 fsc) set for
each input/output will be displayed in hexadecimal.
(DVS-V* * * * series only.)
“STATION * * * FAILURE (DISCONNECT OR POWER DOWN)”
Station number
Press [A], and all table data will be displayed in
hexadecimal.
When [N] is pressed, the table data display will be
canceled.
Setting Procedure
1. Select the menu item [Z].
2. Select a secondary station you want to check using the
cursor.
3. Press [Enter], and “?” appears.
To cancel “?”, press [Enter] again.
4. Press [Ctrl] _ [E], and the display is changed to the
menu screen to begin checking.
3. If [SPACE] is pressed during the display, the display
will be interrupted. When [SPACE] is pressed once
again, the display will begin.
4. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display. The menu
screen will be displayed.
5. After about ten seconds, select the menu item [Z]. If
the secondary station is available for communication,
“?” changes to a device code number.
DISPLAY TABLE DATA
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
0000:49 4E 00 00 00 00 00 00 4F 55 54 00 00 00 00 00 : IN......OUT.....
0010:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0020:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0030:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0040:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0050:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0060:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0070:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0080:56 49 44 00 00 00 00 00 41 31 00 00 00 00 00 00 : VID.....A1......
0090:41 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 34 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : A2......4.......
00A0:35 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : 5.......6.......
00B0:37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : 7.......8.......
00C0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
00D0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
00E0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 FF FF 10 00 00 02 : ................
n
A secondary station to be checked should be set available
for communication in advance at menu item [F : SET
ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER]
SET UNIT DETECTABLE
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
+
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
001-020
021-040
041-060
061-080
081-100
101-120
121-140
141-160
161-180
181-200
201-220
221-240
241-254
M ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
Example of Display
n
For the contents of the table data, refer to the S-BUS
Protocol Manual.
*
*
*
*
*
*
01:DVS-V1616
06:BKS-R3203
11:DVS-TC3232 12:BKDM-5080
16:BKS-R3280 17:BZR-1000
02:DVS-V3232
03:DVS-A3232
04:BKS-R1601
09:BKS-R5000
14:BKS-R3205
05:BKS-R3202
10:DVS-RS1616
15:BKS-R3206
07:BKS-R3281
08:DVS-V6464
13:BKS-R3204
18:DVS-V3232B 19:DVS-V6464B
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
A:SET UNIT LOCATION
Purpose
m
This menu is used to set the input/output location of the
routing switcher.
1. In the initial status (factory setting), the head number
is set to “1”.
2. When DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-
V3232 is used as the primary station, input/output
number can be set freely using the menu item [L : SET
PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT].
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [A].
2. Use the cursor keys ([&], [*] to select the setting
item.
The setting values in this menu are physical input/
output/level numbers.
When selecting crosspoints from the remote control
unit, the virtual input/output/level numbers set at the
menu item [L] are used. In the initial status of [L], the
physical numbers equal the virtual numbers.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the offset value of the input
number and the output number can be typed.
4. Enter the offset value using the numerical keys.
5. Press [Enter] to set the offset value.
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the
original offset value will be returned.
The location is assigned consecutive numbers from the
offset value. The following table lists the input and
output control area assigned from the head number
consecutively.
(Input)
1
512
1
Setting
Area
164
101
101
164
Model
Input
Output Setting Equivalent
Unit
area
Control Control area
area
DVS-V6464B
Location
DVS-V6464B
64
32
64
32
1 to 512
1 to 512
DVS-V3232B
HDS-V3232
512
(Output)
BVS-A3232
256
32
1 to 256 DVS-TC3232
BVS-V3232
BVS-A3232
DVS-V1616
16
16
16
1 to 512
1 to 128
DVS-RS1616
128
6. The menu screen of the secondary station will be
displayed when [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed.
SET UNIT LOCATION
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE No 0001-0064
DESTINATION No 0001-0064
LEVEL No 1
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
G:UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
Purpose
This menu is used to copy the table data stored in the main
CPU board of the secondary station to the backup CPU
board.
This setting is valid only when the optional CPU board is
installed to the secondary station.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [G]. The message “This process
requires about 1 minutes. Execute? (y/n)” will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2. Table data copying is performed when [Y] is pressed.
To cancel copying, press [N].
3. In some software, when copying has been completed,
“PROGRAM TABLE ok? (y/n)” may be displayed at
the same position. In this case, press [Y].
m
1. The ROM version of the main CPU board and that of
the backup CPU board must be the same. If different
versions are used, the unit may hang up due to copy-
ing. Remove the backup CPU board when this occurs.
The above occurs because a new table data can not be
run on the old version software.
2. It takes about 1 minutes to copy the table data.
3. The table data of transcode from RS-422A to S-BUS
(set at menu item [U] of a secondary station) is not
copied to the backup CPU board.
4. When you copy the data of main CPU to
backup CPU on the menu screen [G : UPDATE
BACKUP CONTROLLER] of the primary station or a
secondary station, you can abort the operation by
pressing [Ctrl] _ [D].
However you should copy again for the data of the
backup CPU is not correct if aborted. Even if you do
not copy again, the data will be renewed in one hour
approximately by the auto backup function.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE
Purpose
n
This menu is used to set PHANTOM which switchers
several crosspoints, using the source selection button of the
remote control unit.
If a Description name has been set for the input/output
number, the display of Description has priority to the
display of “Type + Number” even if the “Type + Number”
name is set.
Setting Procedure
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3204 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 16
1. Call the menu screen of the remote control unit to be set,
using menu item [R], and then select menu item [H].
2. Select a item using the cursor.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the phantom table can be set.
If [Enter] is pressed before setting, the registration
will be deleted.
4. Input the data to the phantom table. The phantom
function consists of the global phantom function
registered at the primary station, the normal type of
local phantom function registered at each remote
control unit and the destination off set type of local
phantom function.
SET PHANTOM TABLE (PHANTOM:DESTINATION<SOURCE-LEVEL) (G.PHANTOM NAME:NUMBER)
IN001 :OUT001 <IN001 -0 IN002 :OUT001 <IN002 -0 IN003 :OUT001 <IN003 -0
IN004 :OUT001 <IN004 -0 IN005 :OUT001 <IN005 -0 IN006 :OUT001 <IN006 -0
SONY007:OUT001 <SONY007-0 SONY008:OUT001 <SONY008-0 IN007 :OUT002 <IN001 -0
IN008 :OUT002 <SONY020-0 IN009 :OUT002 <IN003 -0 IN010 :OUT002 <IN004 -0
VTR005 :OUT002 <IN005 -0 VTR006 :OUT002 <IN006 -0 VTR007 :OUT002 <IN007 -0
VTR008 :OUT002 <IN008 -0 SONY009:OUT001 <SONY009-0 SONY010:OUT001 <SONY010-0
IN011 :OUT001 <IN011 -0 IN012 :OUT001 <IN012 -0 SONY013:OUT001 <SONY013-0
SONY014:OUT001 <SONY014-0 SONY015:OUT001 <SONY015-0 IN016 :OUT001 <IN016 -0
VTR009 :OUT002 <IN009 -0 VTR010 :OUT002 <IN010 -0 VTR011 :OUT002 <IN011 -0
VTR012 :OUT002 <IN012 -0 VTR013 :OUT002 <IN013 -0 VTR014 :OUT002 <IN014 -0
VTR015 :OUT002 <IN015 -0 VTR016 :OUT002 <SONY020-0 .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
0
=SONY 1=VTR
8=SL 9=L
Ctrl-E:MENU
2=SUP
A=RET
3=CB
4=AIR
5=ME
6=PGM
E=L/A
7=CL
B=MIX
C=JEEP
D=OSC
F=REN
. Setting the Global Phantom Function
Input the phantom name with the type name and the
number. Next, press [G] at destination name position.
Lastly, input the global phantom number (four digits) set at
the primary station.
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Ctrl-N:NAME
G:GLOBAL PHANTOM
Example of Setting Screen (Normal Type)
. Setting the Local Phantom of the Destination
Offset Type
Enter the phantom name, source name and level number in
the same way as the ordinary local phantom.
When [+] is depressed while the cursor is positioned in the
DESTINATION column, the system enters the Replace-
ment Variable “DST + n” input mode. Enter the offset
value “n” in this status.
. Setting the Normal Type of Local Phantom
Function
a) At [J : NAME STYLE (Type + Num)] in the
primary station menu item [J], input the type name
(between 0 and F) and the number for the phantom
name, destination name, source name and level
number respectively. (When the remote control unit
button is pressed, crosspoints with the same phan-
tom name will be switched together.)
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3216 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 4
SET PHANTOM TABLE (PHANTOM:DESTINATION<SOURCE-LEVEL) (G.PHANTOM NAME:NUMBER)
PHANTOM | DEST
| SOURCE | LEVEL1-8 | PHANTOM | DEST
| SOURCE | LEVEL1-8
SONY001 : OUT001 < IN001
- 10000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
b) At [J : NAME STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)] in the
primary station menu item [J], input the phantom
name and level number in the same way as a). For
the source name and destination name, the Descrip-
tion name and “Type + Number” name can be
selected freely.
Each time [Ctrl] _ [N] are pressed, the Description
name input mode and “Type + Number” name input
mode will be switched alternately.
0=IN
1=OUT
9=CL
2=SONY
A=SL
3=VTR
B=L
4=SUP
C=RET
K=AUX
S=HD
5=CB
6=AIR
E=JEEP
M=BS
7=ME
Description name input mode :
8=PGM
G=L/A
O=SAT
D=MIX
L=COV
T=D1-
F=OSC
N=CS
H=REM
P=CG
I=CAM
Q=WETH
J=STDO
R=TEST
Use the alphabet and numerical keys to enter seven
characters from the head of the Description name.
“Type + Number” name input mode :
U=D2-
V=SEG
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:Type + Num
G:GLOBAL PHANTOM +:DST+
Example of Setting Screen (Destination Offset Type)
Input in the same way as a).
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
5. When [Enter] is pressed, the phantom table will be
set.
6. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen of the
secondary station will be displayed. When [Ctrl] _
[D] is pressed, the menu screen of the primary station
will be displayed.
Internal Process After TAKE Button Pressing :
When pressing the TAKE button after selecting a source/
phantom the following internal process is made. In BKS-
R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210, TAKE is processed immedi-
ately by pressing the source selection button.
TAKE button is pressed
. Execution of Phantom Function
When the phantom function is performed by a remote
control unit, its operation conforms to this phantom table.
It is possible to switch with the specified level or to set ON
(1) or OFF (0) for each level. When level “0” is set or
when “0” is set for all levels, the level value will that set
for the destination name specified in the phantom table.
The indication (specified on the menu item [E : SET
LEVEL TABLE] of the primary station) is as follows :
[Phantom name : Output terminal name < input terminal
name – level setting].
Checks if the selected name exists on the phantom table
If it exists
If it does not exist
Check if the data set in the
phantom table is the global
phantom
YES
NO
Output the global
phantom number
Select the source/destination
set in the phantom table
Check if the secret or protect is set to the selected
source and destination
If neither
secret nor
protect is
set
If secret
or protect
is set
Omit the source and destination
to which the secret or protect is
set
Check the level setting of the
remaining source and destination
for each name.
If the setting is 0, the level is
transferred from the destination
table
Output the signal switching request
Process nothing
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
K: DEFAULT TABLE
L : COPY TABLE DATA
Purpose
This menu is used to copy the table data of the specified
remote control unit. This applies to the remote control unit
as follow.
Purpose
This menu is used to initialize the table data. Do not
perform this menu when modifying the table data.
. Version 3.00 or later : BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203
/R3204/R3205/R3206
Setting Procedure
. Version 1.00 or later : BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210
1. Select menu item [K]. The message “RESET TO
DEFAULT TABLE ok ? (y/n)” will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [L]. This item can be selected from
both the menu and another setting screen.
2. Press [Y] to process the initialization. To cancel
initializing, press [N].
2. As the message “Station Number?” will be displayed on the
screen, input the station number of the unit to be copied.
Select the table name to be copied, from A, P, B and
D, using the alphabet keys.
n
The table data will be lost note when performing the menu
item [K].
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the table data will be copied,
and the screen will return to the setting screen.
4. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed again, the screen will
return to the menu screen of the secondary station.
When [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed, the screen will return to
the menu screen of the primary station.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3202 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 6
A:Copy All table
P:Copy PHANTOM table
B:Copy PANEL table
D:Copy Available Destination table
Inputs A,P,B,D,0-9 Selected = A
Station Number ?
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN
Example of Setting Screen
Selected = A All the table data are copied.
Selected = P Data set at the menu item [H : SET PHAN-
TOM TABLE] are copied.
Selected = B Data set at the menu item [N : SET PANEL
TABLE] are copied.
Selected = D Data set at the menu item [O : SET AVAIL-
ABLE DESTINATION] are copied.
n
The copy function of BKS-R* * * * guarantees upper
compatibility only.
The remote control unit except for BKS-R1607/R1608/
R3209/R3210 may lost a part of the data, when coping the
data from Ver. 3.* * unit to Ver. 1.* * unit, a part of the
data may be lost (global phantom, etc.).
The function is effective when copying the data from Ver.
1.* * unit to Ver. 3.* * unit in a system.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION
(Except for HDS-V3232)
N: SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203)
Purpose
Purpose
This menu is used to set the monitor S-BUS. As this
monitor function is controlled by the local CPU, it has a
monitor data link that is independent from the standard S-
BUS data link.
This menu is used to assign source name to each source
selection button.
Setting Procedure
Therefore, it is necessary to set the primary station and
secondary stations for the monitor S-BUS.
1. Select menu item [N].
2. Select a button number using the cursor.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name can be
typed. If [Enter] is pressed before inputting the
source name, the registration will be deleted.
4. Select the code assigned to each type name, and use
the numerical keys to enter the source name.
5. Press [Enter] to set the source name.
6. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
secondary station.
Setting Procedure
(For the Primary Station on the Monitor S-BUS)
1. Select menu item [M].
2. The menu screen of the primary station on the monitor
S-BUS will be displayed.
For details of setting this menu, refer to “5-3. Setting Items
of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS”.
Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to return to the menu screen of the
primary station.
SET MONITOR FUNCTION
DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PANEL TABLE( SOURCE )
BKS-R1601 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 11
MODIFICATION COMMAND
01 KEY=IN001
05 KEY=IN005
09 KEY=SONY009
13 KEY=SONY013
02 KEY=IN002
06 KEY=IN006
10 KEY=SONY010
14 KEY=SONY014
03 KEY=IN003
07 KEY=SONY007
11 KEY=IN011
15 KEY=SONY015
04 KEY=IN004
08 KEY=SONY008
12 KEY=IN012
16 KEY=IN016
F: SET SCTIVE UNIT NUMBER
M: SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION (COMBINED)
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
0=SONY
8=SL
1=VTR
9=L
2=SUP
A=RET
3=CB
4=AIR
5=ME
6=PGM
E=L/A
7=CL
B=MIX
C=JEEP
D=OSC
F=REN
Example of Setting Screen
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
N: SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621)
Purpose
STATION NUMBER 3
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3219 V1.00
CONTROL DESTINATION = OUT001
SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE)
This menu is used to assign source/destination name to
each source/destination button.
01 KEY=IN001
05 KEY=IN005
02 KEY=IN002
06 KEY=IN006
03 KEY=IN003
07 KEY=IN007
04 KEY=IN004
08 KEY=IN008
09 KEY=....... 10 KEY=....... 11 KEY=....... 12 KEY=.......
13 KEY=....... 14 KEY=....... 15 KEY=....... 16 KEY=.......
17 KEY=IN009
21 KEY=IN013
18 KEY=IN010
22 KEY=IN014
19 KEY=IN011
23 KEY=IN015
20 KEY=IN012
24 KEY=IN016
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [N].
25 KEY=....... 26 KEY=....... 27 KEY=....... 28 KEY=.......
29 KEY=....... 30 KEY=....... 31 KEY=....... 32 KEY=.......
2. Select a button number using the cursor.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the panel table can be typed.
To delete the registration, press [Enter] before
inputting the name.
SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
01 KEY=....... 02 KEY=....... 03 KEY=....... 04 KEY=.......
05 KEY=....... 06 KEY=....... 07 KEY=....... 08 KEY=.......
09 KEY=OUT001
13 KEY=OUT005
10 KEY=OUT002
14 KEY=OUT006
11 KEY=OUT003
15 KEY=OUT007
12 KEY=OUT004
16 KEY=OUT008
17 KEY=....... 18 KEY=....... 19 KEY=....... 20 KEY=.......
21 KEY=....... 22 KEY=....... 23 KEY=....... 24 KEY=.......
4. a) When [J : NAME STYLE (Type + Num)] is
selected in the primary station menu, input the
type name (between 0 and F) and the number for
the source and destination name.
25 KEY=OUT009
29 KEY=OUT013
26 KEY=OUT010
30 KEY=OUT014
27 KEY=OUT011
31 KEY=OUT015
28 KEY=OUT012
32 KEY=OUT016
0=IN
1=OUT
9=CL
2=SONY
A=SL
3=VTR
B=L
4=SUP
C=RET
K=AUX
S=HD
5=CB
6=AIR
E=JEEP
M=BS
7=ME
8=PGM
G=L/A
O=SAT
D=MIX
L=COV
T=D1-
F=OSC
N=CS
H=REM
P=CG
I=CAM
Q=WETH
J=STDO
R=TEST
b) Each time Ctrl N is pressed when [J : NAME
STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)] is selected in the
primary station menu, the following input mode
will be switched alternately.
U=D2-
V=SEG
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME T:TAKE M:MONI V:VTR E:LEVEL
Example of Setting Screen
Description name input mode :
m
When “Ctrl_ N : Type + Num” is displayed on the
screen, it means that the name mode will be
changed to “Type + Number” by pressing [Ctrl] _
[N].
1. In the BKS-R1617/R1621, each button (key) can be
set to both source and destination. In case source and
destination are set to the same button (key), the DEST
button works as a destination button when the DEST
button lights in amber and the DEST button works as a
source button when the DEST button lights in green.
In the 4 DESTINATION mode, both source and
destination can be set to only buttons (keys) 01 to 04.
Other than setting of source button (key), the destina-
tions of block 1 to 4 can be set to destination buttons
01 to 04.
Input Description name from the first to seventh
characters using the alphabet and numerical keys.
“Type + Number” name input mode:
Input in the same way as a).
n
If the Description name has been set for the input/output
number, the display of Description has priority to the
display of “Type + Number” even if the “Type + Number”
name is set.
Be sure to set either source or destination on the
respective buttons (keys) when setting other model.
If both source and destination are set to the same
button (key), it will cause malfunction.
5. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name is set.
6. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen of the
secondary station will be displayed.
2. Set the table data of BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206 by
eight buttons previously in the menu item [Z : SET
____ PANEL STATUS]. If “KEY = ____” is
displayed on the key number position, the name can
not be input.
When [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed, the menu screen of the
primary station will be displayed.
3. When setting description names to the source/destina-
tion buttons, select a name from the description name
group sent to the remote control unit.
If other names are input, these will not be set even if
the [Enter] button is pressed.
In such cases, transfer the group including the desired
description name from the primary station.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
N: SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R3206/R3216)
4. When “T : TAKE M : MONI” is displayed on the
screen, it means that the button on the source side can
be set as the TAKE button or MONI button.
Before pressing [Enter], select a key from the source
side. To set it as the TAKE button, press [T]; to set it
as the MONITOR button, press [M].
5. When “V : VTR” is displayed on the screen, it means
that the VTR control function can be assigned to the
buttons on the source side.
Purpose
This menu is used to assign source name and destination
name to be displayed.
Setting Procedure
The setting procedure is the same as that of menu item [N :
SET PANEL TABLE] (BKS-R3204).
m
Before pressing [Enter], select a key from the source
side and press [V].
Enter the number according to the list of operations on
1. The setting of [SET PANEL TABLE (SOURCE)]
assigns the source name and [SELECT DESTINA-
TION] assigns the destination name.
the bottom of the screen.
2. The destination name can also be assigned using the
button on the front panel. Refer to the Operation
Manual for setting.
3. If “Type + number” name mode is selected in the
menu item [Z : SET PANEL STATUS], (refer to the
Operation Manual of BKS-R3206) “SET PANEL
TABLE (SOURCE)” is not displayed.
6. When “E : LEVEL” is displayed on the screen, it
means that the level control function can be assigned
to the buttons on the source side.
Before pressing [Enter], select a key from the source
side and press [E].
Enter the number according to the list of levels on the
bottom of the screen.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PANEL TABLE( SOURCE )
BKS-R3206 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 18
01 KEY=IN001
05 KEY=IN005
09 KEY=SONY009
13 KEY=SONY013
02 KEY=IN002
06 KEY=IN006
10 KEY=SONY010
14 KEY=SONY014
03 KEY=IN003
07 KEY=SONY007
11 KEY=IN011
15 KEY=SONY015
04 KEY=IN004
08 KEY=SONY008
12 KEY=IN012
16 KEY=IN016
n
In BKS-R1607 of version V1.10 and higher, any desired
button among the sixteen buttons can be set as a TAKE
button.
When this setting is performed, the name selected by the
SELECTOR knob on the front panel can be taken by
pressing the TAKE button.
SELECT DESTINATION
01
05
09
13
OUT001
OUT005
OUT009
OUT013
02
06
10
14
OUT002
OUT006
OUT010
OUT014
03
07
11
15
OUT003
OUT007
OUT011
OUT015
04
08
12
16
OUT004
OUT008
OUT012
OUT016
0=IN
1=OUT
9=CL
2=SONY
A=SL
3=VTR
B=L
4=SUP
C=RET
K=AUX
S=HD
5=CB
6=AIR
E=JEEP
M=BS
7=ME
(Maximum inputs 512 x outputs 512)
8=PGM
G=L/A
O=SAT
D=MIX
L=COV
T=D1-
F=OSC
N=CS
H=REM
P=CG
I=CAM
Q=WETH
J=STDO
R=TEST
U=D2-
V=SEG
The actual setting procedure is as follows. Select a key
from the source side which you want to use as the TAKE
button. Press the [T] button.
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME
Example of Setting Screen
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R1607 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 12
SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE) CONTROL DESTINATION = OUT244
01 KEY=SRC004
05 KEY=SRC002
09 KEY=SRC009
13 KEY=.......
02 KEY=SRC005
03 KEY=SRC006
07 KEY=SRC007
11 KEY=SRC013
15 KEY=.......
04 KEY=SRC001
06 KEY=SRC003
10 KEY=SRC010
14 KEY=.......
08 KEY=SRC008
12 KEY=SRC014
16 KEY=TAKE
SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
01 KEY=.......
05 KEY=.......
09 KEY=.......
13 KEY=OUT001
02 KEY=.......
06 KEY=.......
10 KEY=.......
14 KEY=OUT012
03 KEY=.......
07 KEY=.......
11 KEY=.......
15 KEY=OUT003
04 KEY=.......
08 KEY=.......
12 KEY=.......
16 KEY=.......
0=SRC
8=8
1=OUT
9=9
2=2
A=A
3=3
B=B
4=4
C=C
5=5
D=D
6=6
E=E
7=7
F=F
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME T:TAKE
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION
(BKS-R3202/R3206)
O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION
(BKS-R1607/R3210/R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/
R3220/R1621)
Purpose
This menu is used to set the destination which can be
selected by the remote control unit.
Purpose
This menu sets the range of selectable destinations and the
range of selectable sources corresponding to the range of
selectable destinations.
Setting Procedure
1. Call the menu screen of the remote control unit to be
set using menu item [R], and then select menu item
[O].
2. Select the destination using the cursor.
Press [(] and [)] when the cursor is placed at the top
or bottom, and the next destination number will
appear. The destination numbers are 001 to 512.
3. When press [Enter], the status of the destination
indicated by cursor will be changed.
Setting procedure
1. Invoke the menu display of the remote control unit to set
the menu item [R]. Then select the menu item [O].
2. Select a destination to be set using the cursor key.
When the key [(], [)] is pressed while the cursor key
is located either top end or bottom end of display, the
display moves to that of the next terminal number.
The output terminal numbers are from 001 to 512.
3. Pressing [Enter] toggles between selection and non-
selection of destination shown by cursor.
m
m
. The destination name indicated on this screen can be
selected from the remote control unit.
. The destination indicated as “ · · · · ” is not registered
on the destination table.
. The blank destination can not be selected from the
remote control unit.
. The destinations whose names are displayed, can be
selected from this remote control.
. The indication “ · · · · ” means that the name is not
registered yet on the destination table.
. The blank destination cannot be selected from the
panel.
4. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to display the menu screen of the
secondary station.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SELECT DESTINATION NAME
BKS-R3216 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 4
0001=OUT001
0005=OUT005
0009=OUT009
0013=OUT013
0017=OUT017
0021=OUT021
0025=OUT025
0029=OUT029
0033=OUT033
0037=OUT037
0041=OUT041
0045=OUT045
0049=OUT049
0053=OUT053
0057=OUT057
0061=OUT061
0002=OUT002
0006=OUT006
0010=OUT010
0014=OUT014
0018=OUT018
0022=OUT022
0026=OUT026
0030=OUT030
0034=OUT034
0038=OUT038
0042=OUT042
0046=OUT046
0050=OUT050
0054=OUT054
0058=OUT058
0062=OUT062
0003=OUT003
0007=OUT007
0011=OUT011
0015=OUT015
0019=OUT019
0023=OUT023
0027=OUT027
0031=OUT031
0035=OUT035
0039=OUT039
0043=OUT043
0047=OUT047
0051=OUT051
0055=OUT055
0059=OUT059
0063=OUT063
0004=OUT004
0008=OUT008
0012=OUT012
0016=OUT016
0020=OUT020
0024=OUT024
0028=OUT028
0032=OUT032
0036=OUT036
0040=OUT040
0044=OUT044
0048=OUT048
0052=OUT052
0056=OUT056
0060=OUT060
0064=OUT064
Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to display the menu screen of the
primary station.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SELECT DESTINATION NAME
BKS-R3202 V3.10
STATION NUMBER 7
001=OUT001
005=OUT005
009=OUT009
013=OUT013
017=OUT017
021=OUT021
025=OUT025
029=OUT029
033=OUT033
037=OUT037
041=OUT041
045=OUT045
049=
002=OUT002
006=OUT006
010=OUT010
014=OUT014
018=OUT018
022=OUT022
026=OUT026
030=OUT030
034=OUT034
038=OUT038
042=OUT042
046=OUT046
050=OUT050
054=OUT054
058=
003=OUT003
007=OUT007
011=OUT011
015=OUT015
019=OUT019
023=OUT023
027=OUT027
031=OUT031
035=OUT035
039=OUT039
043=OUT043
047=OUT047
051=OUT051
055=OUT055
059=
004=OUT004
008=OUT008
012=OUT012
016=OUT016
020=OUT020
024=OUT024
028=OUT028
032=OUT032
036=OUT036
040=OUT040
044=OUT044
048=
052=OUT052
056=OUT056
060=
053=OUT053
057=
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Ctrl-F:SELECT SOURCE
061=OUT061
062=OUT062
063=OUT063
064=OUT064
Example of Setting Screen (Selectable Destination)
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
4. Press [Ctrl] _ [F] to switch to the display allowing
Example of Setting Screen
setting of the selectable sources.
Pressing [Ctrl] _ [E] switches to the menu screen of
the secondary station.
Pressing [Ctrl] _ [D] returns to the menu screen of the
primary station.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
. Procedure of setting SELECT SOURCE NAME
(Input)
1024
164
101
64
1
1. Select an item to set using the cursor key.
2. Pressing [Enter] establishes the source name input
mode.
Block 2
Block 1
3. Enter the “Type + No.” name or description name.
4. Press [Enter] to confirm the input contents.
64
Example of setting
101
Block
Source
Destination
(Used area) (Input range)
(Output range)
Block 3
TOP
END
TOP
END
1
2
3
1
64
1
64
164
101
101
164
164
1
64
101
164
1024
(Output)
Virtual matrix
When the ranges of input and output selections are limited
as shown in the above table, the setting display and the
virtual matrix are configured as shown below.
: Used areas
: Un-used areas
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SELECT SOURCE NAME
BKS-R3216 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 4
m
SRC TOP -SRC END =DST TOP -DST END
001 IN001
002 IN101
003 IN101
-IN064
-IN164
-IN164
=OUT001 -OUT064
=OUT001 -OUT064
=OUT101 -OUT164
1. When selecting the destinations that have no limit of
range, the selectable range of sources is from 001 to
1024.
2. BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621
makes all the sources within the range that includes the
selected destinations valid. OUT001 makes the
multiple ranges of IN001 to IN064 and IN101 to
IN164 valid when the selection is made as shown in
“Example of Setting Screen”.
004 ....... -....... =....... -.......
005 ....... -....... =....... -.......
006 ....... -....... =....... -.......
007 ....... -....... =....... -.......
008 ....... -....... =....... -.......
0=IN
1=OUT
9=CL
2=SONY
A=SL
3=VTR
B=L
4=SUP
C=RET
K=AUX
S=HD
5=CB
6=AIR
E=JEEP
M=BS
7=ME
8=PGM
G=L/A
O=SAT
D=MIX
L=COV
T=D1-
F=OSC
N=CS
In BKS-R1607/R3210 of version V1.10 and higher, a pair
of source signal and key signal can be output as an inter-
locked pair using the offset-type phantom. (See OUT1 to
H=REM
P=CG
I=CAM
Q=WETH
J=STDO
R=TEST
U=D2-
V=SEG
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:Type + Num Ctrl-F:SELECT DESTINATION
OUT4 in the following illustration.)
Odd number : Source
Example of Setting Screen
(Setting the range of selectable sources)
Even number : Key
(Input) 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
n
1
In BKS-R1607/R3210 of version V1.10 and higher, the sig-
nal switching cannot be performed when the destination
range that is set by SELECT SOURCE NAME is exceeded
even when the destination-type offset phantom has already
been set using the menu item [H]. Setting must be per-
formed so that the resultant value of destination after addi-
tion and subtraction of offset stays within the eight blocks of
SELECT SOURCE NAME. When the offset value is zero
(DST+0), the signal switching can be operated.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Output)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
Example of setting :
SRC TOP-SRC END=DST TOP-DST END indicates the
applicable range of the offset-type phantom on the screen
of example setting. When the range from IN001 to IN008,
and the range from OUT001 to OUT004 are to be set as
the applicable range, enter as follows.
IN001-IN008=OUT001-OUT004
When you want execute the combinations of
OUT001<IN001 and OUT002<IN002, or the combinations
of OUT003<IN001 and OUT004<IN002, enter as follows.
Phantom:
IN001: DST+0<IN001-10000000
IN001: DST+1<IN002-10000000
Here, 10000000 means the level-1. The level-2 corre-
sponds to 0100000.
When the above settings are performed and the buttons
OUT001 and IN001 are pressed in this order, OUT001 is
replaced by OUT002 with DST+1.
Then,
OUT001<IN001
OUT002<IN002
of the level-1 are switched.
When the buttons OUT003 and IN001 are pressed in this
order,
OUT003<IN001
OUT004<IN001
of the level-1 are switched.
When OUT005 and IN001 are pressed, DST+0<IN001-
10000000 (i.e., OUT005<IN001) only are switched since it
is outside the applicable range.
Set the phantom for IN003, IN005 and IN007 in the same
way.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
R: SET ROUTE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210/R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621)
Purpose
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3216 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 4
SET ROUTE(ROUTE DESTINATION:DESTINATION<SOURCE-LEVEL)
This is the function to display the source names that are
expanded by combining the two switchers for the purpose
of expanding numbers of input.
ROUTE
| DEST
| SOURCE | LEVEL1-8 | ROUTE
| DEST
| SOURCE | LEVEL1-8
- 10000000
OUT001 : OUT017 < IN005
- 10000000 | OUT002 : OUT018 < IN006
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
When a route is set, the source that is connected to the
route destination, is automatically chased out the and the
name of the source is displayed. In an example shown
below, IN001 of the switcher A is displayed as the source
name when OUT017 of the switcher B is selected.
It has another function as follows. When a request of
switching including the expanded destination, is issued,
crosspoint of the route destination side is automatically
switched. For example, when IN001-OUT001 of the
switcher A is switched, IN005-OUT017 of the switcher B
is also switched at the same time.
0=IN
1=OUT
9=CL
2=SONY
A=SL
3=VTR
B=L
4=SUP
C=RET
K=AUX
S=HD
5=CB
6=AIR
E=JEEP
M=BS
7=ME
8=PGM
G=L/A
O=SAT
D=MIX
L=COV
T=D1-
F=OSC
N=CS
H=REM
P=CG
I=CAM
Q=WETH
J=STDO
R=TEST
U=D2-
V=SEG
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME +:DST+
Example of Setting Screen
In the setting screen example as shown above, the cross-
point of IN005-OUT017 is switched at the same time when
a crosspoints including OUT001 (ex. IN002-OUT001) is
switched. Then, source (IN002) of the switcher-A’s
OUT001 is displayed (IN002-OUT017) for OUT017 of the
switcher-B. The above described operation is executed by
selecting OUT001 and IN002 from the remote control unit.
However, it is recommended to set the phantom of IN002:
OUT001 < IN002 beforehand on the remote control panel,
because the operation of selecting IN002-OUT001 instead
of OUT017 looks unnatural when IN002-OUT017 is going
to be taken.
1 2
3
4
IN
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
Expansion input
IN 5 6
7
8
OUT17
OUT18
OUT19
Level1
Switcher A
Level1
Switcher B
Route Function
To add the offset amount to the selected destination, enter
[+] in the DEST column before pressing [Enter].
After “DEST +” is displayed, enter the offset value (0 to
1023) and press [Enter] to store the value.
Setting procedure
1. Select the menu item [R] of the secondary station.
2. Select the desired item using the cursor key.
3. Pressing [Enter] establishes the route setting mode.
When [Enter] is pressed again before entering data,
registration is canceled.
Each level can be set by selecting ON (1) or OFF (0).
4. Enter the “Type + No.” name or description name.
(The setting methods remains the same as that of
phantom. Refer to the description of the secondary
station’s menu item [H : SET PHANTOM TABLE].
However, the destination name of the switcher-A to
which source of the switcher-B is connected, should be
input on this menu, instead of the phantom name.)
5. Press [Enter] to confirm the input contents.
6. Pressing [Ctrl] _ [E] switches to the menu screen of
the secondary station.
Pressing [Ctrl] _ [D] returns to the menu screen of the
primary station.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Purpose
n
This menu is used to check the group and names of the
Description transferred from the primary station.
In BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210 of version V1.10 and
higher, the 160 description names that are transferred from
the primary station can be registered in the range of inputs
512 x outputs 512 in the order of terminal number regard-
less of the block number. When you want to use more than
160 of the description names, transmit the names from the
primary station after dividing the description names into
several blocks.
Check Procedure
1. When [Enter] or [SPACE] is pressed, the screen will
be changed to the next page.
2. When [BS] or [DEL] is pressed, the screen will be
changed to the previous page.
3. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to display the menu screen of the
secondary station.
The following operations are possible from the screen.
Look at destination from source side : [*] key
Look at source from destination side : [&] key
Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to display the menu screen of the
primary station.
Return to the previous page :
Move to the next page :
[(] key
[)] key
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
GROUP No. = 1
BKS-R3206 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 16
No. Terminal Name
Description Name
No. Terminal Name
Description Name
1 DST- 001 OUT001 London
2 DST- 002 OUT002 NewYork
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SOURCE
BKS-R3210 V1.10
STATION NUMBER 6
3 SRC- 001 IN001
5 SRC- 003 IN003
7 SRC- 005 IN005
9 SRC- 007 IN007
Berlin
Tokyo
4 SRC- 002 IN002
6 SRC- 004 IN004
8 SRC- 006 IN006
Moscow
Cairo
name
1 IN001
3 IN003
5 IN005
7 IN007
9 IN009
11 IN011
13 IN013
15 IN015
17 IN017
19 IN019
21 IN021
23 IN023
25 IN025
27 IN027
29 IN029
31 IN031
Description
CAM001
CAM003
VTR005
VTR007
ONAIR01
ONAIR03
STADIO1
STADIO3
MONI001
IN019
name
2 IN002
4 IN004
6 IN006
8 IN008
10 IN010
12 IN012
14 IN014
16 IN016
18 IN018
20 IN020
22 IN022
24 IN024
26 IN026
28 IN028
30 IN030
32 IN032
Description
Berjing
Tpronto
Madrid
CAM002
CAM004
VTR006
VTR008
ONAIR02
ONAIR04
STADIO2
STADIO4
MONI002
IN020
10 DST- 005 OUT005 Paris
12 DST- 012 VTR012 OUT012
14 DST- 014 VTR014 OUT014
16 DST- 016 SONY016 OUT016
18 DST- 018 VTR018 OUT018
20 DST- 020 VTR020 OUT020
22 DST- 022 VTR022 OUT022
24 DST- 024 VTR024 OUT024
26 DST- 026 VTR026 OUT026
28 DST- 028 VTR028 OUT028
30 DST- 030 VTR030 OUT030
32 DST- 032 VTR032 OUT032
34 DST- 034 VTR034 OUT034
36 DST- 036 VTR036 OUT036
38 DST- 038 VTR038 OUT038
40 DST- 040 VTR040 OUT040
11 DST- 008 OUT008 Rome
13 DST- 013 VTR013 OUT013
15 DST- 015 VTR015 OUT015
17 DST- 017 VTR017 OUT017
19 DST- 019 VTR019 OUT019
21 DST- 021 VTR021 OUT021
23 DST- 023 VTR023 OUT023
25 DST- 025 VTR025 OUT025
27 DST- 027 VTR027 OUT027
29 DST- 029 VTR029 OUT029
31 DST- 031 VTR031 OUT031
33 DST- 033 VTR033 OUT033
35 DST- 035 VTR035 OUT035
37 DST- 037 VTR037 OUT037
39 DST- 039 VTR039 OUT039
IN021
IN022
IN023
IN024
IN025
IN026
IN027
IN028
IN029
IN030
IN031
IN032
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Right:DESTINATION Left:SOURCE
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Ctrl-H:Pg-Up
Ctrl-M:Pg-Dn
Example of Setting Screen
Example of Setting Screen
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
DESTINATION
BKS-R3210 V1.10
STATION NUMBER 6
name
Description
name
Description
1 OUT001 DST001
3 OUT003 DST003
5 OUT005 DST005
7 OUT007 DST007
9 OUT009 OUT009
11 OUT011 OUT011
13 OUT013 OUT013
15 OUT015 OUT015
17 OUT017 OUT017
19 OUT019 OUT019
21 OUT021 OUT021
23 OUT023 OUT023
25 OUT025 OUT025
27 OUT027 OUT027
29 OUT029 OUT029
31 OUT031 OUT031
2 OUT002 DST002
4 OUT004 DST004
6 OUT006 DST006
8 OUT008 DST008
10 OUT010 OUT010
12 OUT012 OUT012
14 OUT014 OUT014
16 OUT016 OUT016
18 OUT018 OUT018
20 OUT020 OUT020
22 OUT022 OUT022
24 OUT024 OUT024
26 OUT026 OUT026
28 OUT028 OUT028
30 OUT030 OUT030
32 OUT032 OUT032
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Right:DESTINATION Left:SOURCE
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
U: SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL
Purpose
n
This menu is used to set channels A and B of REMOTE 2
(D-sub 9-pin) to loop-through. When the REMOTE 2
control mode is set to DIRECT, this menu is used to set the
protocol and the conversion table of the input/output
numbers.
The same number cannot be set to more than one place. If
the same number is used, the message “* * * is used
already; Ignored” will be displayed and the cursor will stop
at its current position.
There are three kinds of protocols.
. PRODUCTION SWITCHER PROTOCOL
. AUDIO MIXER PROTOCOL
SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL
CHANNEL = A
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
UA2 = 10000000
REMOTE = CART+
. CART PROTOCOL
SET DESTINATION TRANSCODE( CN NUM.= REMOTE NUM.)
1=001
9=009
2=002
3=003
4=004
5=005
6=006
7=007
8=008
10=010
18=018
26=026
34=034
42=042
50=050
58=058
11=011
19=019
27=027
35=035
43=043
51=051
59=059
12=012
20=020
28=028
36=036
44=044
52=052
60=060
13=013
21=021
29=029
37=037
45=045
53=053
61=061
14=014
22=022
30=030
38=038
46=046
54=054
62=062
15=015
23=023
31=031
39=039
47=047
55=055
63=063
16=016
24=024
32=032
40=040
48=048
56=056
64=064
n
17=017
25=025
33=033
41=041
49=049
57=057
AUDIO MIXER PROTOCOL was known as “SWITCH-
ER PROTOCOL” before.
SET SOURCE TRANSCODE( CN NUM.= REMOTE NUM.)
Set the conversion table of the input/output numbers so
that the input/output numbers defined by the external
controller will correspond to those of the routing switcher.
In the THROUGH mode, there will be no setting menu for
channel B. For details of the DIRECT mode, refer to the
menu item [U : SELECT CONTROL MODE] in the
primary station.
1=001
9=009
2=002
3=003
4=004
5=005
6=006
7=007
8=008
10=010
18=018
26=026
34=034
42=042
50=050
58=058
11=011
19=019
27=027
35=035
43=043
51=051
59=059
12=012
20=020
28=028
36=036
44=044
52=052
60=060
13=013
21=021
29=029
37=037
45=045
53=053
61=061
14=014
22=022
30=030
38=038
46=046
54=054
62=062
15=015
23=023
31=031
39=039
47=047
55=055
63=063
16=016
24=024
32=032
40=040
48=048
56=056
64=064
17=017
25=025
33=033
41=041
49=049
57=057
CAS=065
F1:REMOTE F2:DEFAULT F3:DEST. F4:SOURCE
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [U].
Example of Setting Screen
2. “SELECT RS-422 CHANNEL =? (A B) A” will be
displayed. Input A or B using the alphabet keys and
press [Enter]. The screen will change to the setting
screen of the selected channel.
Operating Function Keys
[F1] : REMOTE (To switch the protocol)
1. When [F1] is pressed, the cursor will move to
“REMOTE”.
2. When [Enter] is pressed, the protocol will be
switched. To change the “* * *” of “UA2 =”,
select the desired position with the cursor and
press [Enter] to switch 1/0 alternately.
SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
SELECT RS-422 CHANNEL ? (A--B) A
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
3. The cursor will be placed at “1=001” of “SET DESTI-
NATION TRANSCODE”.
n
The description “* * *” of “UA2 =* * *” on the above
menu corresponds to the DIP switch setting which LSB is
at the left end.
When [Enter] is pressed, “1=” will be displayed and
the number can be typed. The left “1” in “1=001”
indicates the input/output number of the switcher and
the right “001” indicates the command number
received.
[F2] : DEFAULT (Initializing the data)
1. When [F2] is pressed, “DEFAULT ok? (y/n)”
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2. When [Y] is pressed, the program will be
executed. When [N] is pressed, it will not be
executed.
4. Input a number between 1 and 128 and press [Enter]
set it. The cursor will move to the next number.
If “00” is input, “001” will be displayed. If number
129 or later is input, the previous number will be
displayed. If [Enter] is pressed without inputting
anything, invalid crosspoints will be set so that the
screen will show “ · · · · ”, and the cursor will move to
the next number. When [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before
the setting, the previous number will be displayed and
the cursor will move to the next number.
[F3] : DEST
When [F3] is pressed, the cursor will move to the
destination side.
[F4] : SOURCE
When [F4] is pressed, the cursor will move to the
source side.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS
(Except for HDS-V3232)
Y : DISPLAY TABLE DATA
(Except for HDS-V3232)
Purpose
Purpose
This menu is used to display the status of the hardware
such as boards, etc.
This menu is used to display the table data set with the
control terminal.
n
For the input/output boards and matrix boards of DVS-
V3232B, channel 1 to 32 will be displayed. And FAN 1
and 2 will be displayed for DVS-V3232B.
Operation Procedure
1. Select menu item [Y]. The following message will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Display: “DISPLAY TABLE DATA? (y/n)”
2. Press [Y], and the 4:2:2/4 fsc setting value will be
displayed in hexadecimal. Press [A], and the table
data will be displayed in hexadecimal.
Operating Procedure
1. Select menu item [V].
2. Press [Ctrl] _ [E]. The menu screen will be dis-
played.
When [N] is pressed, the table data display will be
cancelled.
DISPLAY UNIT STATUS
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 2
3. When [SPACE] is pressed during the display, the
display will be interrupted. When [SPACE] is
pressed once again, the display will begin.
4. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display. The menu
screen of the secondary station will be displayed.
INPUT BOARD
01-32
INPUT CONNECTOR BOARD
INPUT CASCADE CONNECTOR BOARD
REV. 00
REV. 00
01-16
17-32
33-48
49-64
BNC
BNC
01-32
33-64
VALID
VALID
33-64
BNC
OUTPUT BOARD
01-32
INVALID
OUTPUT CASCADE CONNECTOR BOARD
INVALID
01-32
33-64
VALID
VALID
33-64
REV. 00 OUTPUT CONNECTOR BOARD
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
BNC
MATRIX BOARD
CASCADE
REFERENCE SIGNAL MISSING
SELECT FIELD
DISPLAY TABLE DATA
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 17
01-32(OUT) REV. 00
33-64(OUT) REV. 00
CASCADE
BNC
0000:49 4E 00 00 00 00 00 00 4F 55 54 00 00 00 00 00 : IN......OUT.....
0010:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0020:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0030:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0040:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0050:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0060:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0070:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0080:56 49 44 00 00 00 00 00 41 31 00 00 00 00 00 00 : VID.....A1......
0090:41 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 34 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : A2......4.......
00A0:35 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : 5.......6.......
00B0:37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : 7.......8.......
00C0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
00D0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
00E0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 FF FF 10 00 00 02 : ................
CASCADE
CASCADE
CASCADE
INVALID
CONTROL BOARD
POWER SUPPLIES
MAIN S-BUS RS422 49-56
A
B
ON
M V2.10 V2.02 V2.10 57-64
INVALID
B
INVALID
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4
OPTION BOARD
CONNECTOR BOARD
VALID
ROT
ROT
ROT
ROT
INVALID
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Display
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Display
n
For the details of the table data, refer to the S-BUS Proto-
col Manual.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
Y : SET DISPLAY MODES (BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621)
Purpose
Setting Procedure
This menu is used to set the display mode.
The setting contents are as follows.
1. Select the menu item [Y].
2. The cursor appears in “DISPLAY MODES = 1”.
Move the cursor to an arbitrary mode and press
[Enter] establishes the input mode.
3. Enter the desired number with the numeric keys.
Press [Enter] to set the number ; the cursor moves to
the next setting item.
DISPLAY MODES (BKS-R3216/R3220):
Selects the display type. (when J : NAME STYLE
(DESCRIP.NAME) is selected in the primary station
menu.)
NORMAL = Normal display
2 + 2CHAR = Displays two letters before and after the
name.
If you do not want to change the default value, press
[Enter] without entering any number.
4. To set “TALLY GROUP”, move the cursor to the
position of the desired tally (in the case of tally 2,
second “_” from the left) and press [Enter]. The item
is toggled on and off every time [Enter] is pressed.
(When the number is displayed, the item is ON. When
“_” is displayed, the item is OFF.)
4CHAR =
Displays four letters from the beginning
of the name.
n
If 2 : 2 + 2CHAR or 3 : 4CHAR is selected when J :
NAME STYLE (Type + Num) is selected in the primary
station menu, the two letters and two numbers of the type
name are displayed.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET DISPLAY MODES
BKS-R3220 V1.03
STATION NUMBER 2
DISPLAY MODES
PANEL FUNCTION
TALLY GROUP
= 1
1:NORMAL 2:2+2CHAR
3:4CHAR *:UNRELATED
*:UNRELATED
= *
1:NORMAL 2:4 DESTINATION
= 1---
PANEL FUNCTION (BKS-R1617/R1618/R3219/R1621):
Sets the operation mode of the panel.
NORMAL =
Normal selection mode
4 DESTINATION = Destinations can be set for each
block of the source button that
consists of four blocks.
Set each source button and also set
the destination of each block using
the menu item [N : SET PANEL
TABLE].
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN
TALLY GROUP
Example of Setting Screen
Selects the tally group.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT
(Except for HDS-V3232)
Purpose
Operating Function Keys
This menu is used to set the format of signals fed to the
input/output board of DVS-V3232B and DVS-V6464B
with the control terminal.
This setting is available when the manual switch for the
format on each input/output board is OFF.
[F1] : FORMAT (Mode which sets the signal format by 8-
channels)
[F2] : FIELD (Mode which sets the crosspoint switching
field)
1. Press [F2]. The cursor will move to “SWITCH
ING FIELD” in the menu.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [Z].
2. Press [Enter]. The setting will change.
(ODD → EVEN → FIELD → ASYNC → ODD)
All switching field in the switcher are deter
mined by this setting.
2. Select a channel line using the cursor to be set. (The
channels will be switched by eight channels.
Displayed signal formats that are enclosed by the
round brackets as “(4:2:2)” have been set on the board
and cannot be modified with the control terminal.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting will change
(“4:2:2” → “4 fsc NTSC” → “4 fsc PAL”).
4. Press [S] (Table Set), and the content now appeared is
copied to the area of SDI FORMAT TABLE.
5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and the menu
screen of the secondary station will be displayed.
n
To use RS-422A and S-BUS together, set the switching
field as follows.
1 When using the S-BUS and CART protocol together :
ODD
2 When using the S-BUS and PRODUCTION
SWITCHER protocol together : FIELD
Note that the switching timing of the CART will not be
accurate if the CART and PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
protocols are used together.
SELECT SDI FORMAT
DESTINATION UNIT
DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE UNIT
Switching timing is not guaranteed in the combination of
different switching fields.
For details of the signal switching timing, refer to “5-8.
Signal Switching Timing”.
01 - 08 : 4:2:2
09 - 16 : 4fsc NTSC
17 - 24 : 4fsc PAL
25 - 32 : 4:2:2
33 - 40 : 4:2:2
41 - 48 : 4:2:2
49 - 56 :( 4:2:2 )
57 - 64 : 4:2:2
01 - 08 : 4:2:2
09 - 16 : 4:2:2
17 - 24 : 4:2:2
25 - 32 : 4:2:2
33 - 40 : 4:2:2
41 - 48 : 4:2:2
49 - 56 :( 4:2:2 )
57 - 64 : 4:2:2
SWITCHING FIELD
FIELD
F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
n
Unless pressing [S], the data will be deleted when the
power is turned off.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206)
Purpose
5. When “PANEL MODE=3” (the DAUGHTER) is
selected on BKS-R3204, the MOTHER ID number is
displayed as “MOTHER STATION ID= xx”. The
MOTHER ID number is set using the switch on the
rear panel. If switch setting is 0, 1, 255, “Incorrect ID
(0, 1, 255) is designated.” is displayed, while “The
designated ID is not found” is displayed if the mother
station ID is not registered in the block.
6. In setting of BKS-R3206 different from BKS-R3204/
R3205, there is no “SELECT SOURCE OR DESTI-
NATION ASSIGNMENT”, Use either “Type name +
Number” or “the source direct” to designate the source
name.
Besides the remote control unit can be used alone, several
units can be used together as if it were one unit with
expanded sources and destinations. When using several
units together, one will serve as the mother and the rest
will serve as the daughters.
This menu is used to perform the settings necessary in such
cases. The selection of stand alone use, mother use, and
daughter use is performed in this menu in addition to the
assignment of buttons on the front panel. If assigned as the
mother station, a block number should be set. (up to 10
mothers can be registered.)
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [Z].
“PANEL LAYOUT= x” is displayed. Press [Enter]
and input the numbers.
2. Place the cursor on “PANEL MODE=1” and press
[Enter] to select an item. Selection should be per-
formed using the following keys.
7. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to display to the menu screen of the
secondary station.
Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to display to the menu screen of the
primary station.
BKS-R3204 : 1. STAND ALONE
3. DAUGHTER
2. MOTHER
BKS-R3205 : 1. STAND ALONE
BKS-R3206 : 1. STAND ALONE
If selection is not necessary, press [Enter] again.
3. Place the cursor on “KEY 1-8=S” and press [Enter] to
set S or D. The button number is set in order from top
left to right, then left bottom to right as shown below.
2. MOTHER
2. MOTHER
n
When “PANEL MODE=1” (the STAND ALONE) is
selected on BKS-R3204 and BKS-R3205, all KEYs (1 to
32) can not be assigned as DESTINATION. If all is set as
DESTINATION, the KEYs 1 to 8 are set to “KEYs 1 to
8=S” automatically.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PANEL STATUS
BKS-R3204 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
PANEL MODE = 1
1:STAND ALONE
2:MOTHER
3:DAUGHTER
To change to the next setting, press [Enter].
SET SOURCE OR DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT
KEY 1- 8 = S
KEY 9-16 = S
KEY 25-32 = S
KEY 17-24 = S
4. When “PANEL MODE=2” (the MOTHER) is select-
ed, move the cursor to “SET BLOCK NUMBER=X”
and press [Enter] to enter block number. When
[Enter] is pressed again, the block number will be set.
If the mother station is set, the ID are displayed.
S:SOURCE
D:DESTINATION
MOTHER STATION ID=12(BKS-R3206)
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST
BLOCK 1 = STATION 12 | BLOCK 6 = .......
BLOCK 2 = STATION 5
BLOCK 3 = STATION 2
BLOCK 4 = STATION 3
BLOCK 5 = .......
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Example of Setting Screen (BKS-R3204)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R1607/R1608/
R3209/R3210/R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/
R3220/R1621)
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PANEL STATUS
BKS-R3205 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 11
Purpose
PANEL MODE = 1
1:STAND ALONE
2:MOTHER
This is the function to set the various modes of the remote
control unit. In the models corresponding this menu as
shown above the multiple units can be connected in order
to expand the number of sources and destinations which
can be controlled simultaneously. Setting the mother panel
and the daughter panels is performed from this menu.
(Maximum ten mother panels can be set.)
SET SOURCE OR DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT
KEY 1- 8 = S
KEY 17-24 = S
S:SOURCE
KEY 9-16 = S
KEY 25-32 = S
D:DESTINATION
SET BLOCK NUMBER=3
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST
BLOCK 1 = STATION 11 | BLOCK 6 = .......
BLOCK 2 = STATION 5
BLOCK 3 = STATION 2
BLOCK 4 = STATION 3
BLOCK 5 = .......
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
Contents to be set are shown below.
DISPLAY MODE
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
STATUS = Indicates the status of the primary station’s
crosspoint table.
Example of Setting Screen (BKS-R3205)
PROMPT = The depressed button lit immediately.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R3206 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 2
PROTECT MODE
SET PANEL STATUS
ON AIR = Switching is performed from that panel even
after protected.
NORMAL = Switching is prohibited after protected.
FLEXIBLE =Switching is prohibited after protected.
However, protections by other stations can
be released.*1
PANEL MODE = 2
1:STAND ALONE
PANEL LAYOUT = 2
2:MOTHER
1: KEY + NUMBER SELECT MODE
2: SOURCE DIRECT SELECT MODE
SET BLOCK NUMBER = 2
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST
FLEX & OA =Uses the functions of both 1 : ON AIR
and 3 : FLEXIBLE. *1
BLOCK 1 = STATION 11 | BLOCK 6 = .......
BLOCK 2 = STATION 5
BLOCK 3 = STATION 2
BLOCK 4 = STATION 3
BLOCK 5 = .......
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
PHANTOM PROTECT
PART PROT = The phantoms that are not protected are
switched.
Example of Setting Screen (BKS-R3206)
FULL PROT = All phantoms cannot be switched when
even one phantom on which protect is
set to on, is included.
BUTTON LINK = All phantoms cannot be switched
when the protect button is set to on.
PANEL MODE
STAND ALONE = Stand alone panel
MOTHER = Mother panel
DAUGHTER = Daughter panel
PANEL LAYOUT*2
TYPE + NUM. = Selection of X-Y
DIRECT = Direct selection*3
BPS = Source button selection*1
KEYPAD = Description selection*1
(Only BKS-R3216 is valid.)
*1 : It is only applicable to BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621.
*2 : It is only applicable to BKS-R3210/R3216.
*3 : BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210
5-43
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
LEVEL MODE*1
Setting Procedure
SINGLE = Single level selection
MULTI = Multiple level selection
1. Select the menu item [Z].
2. The cursor appears in “DISPLAY MODE = 1”.
Move the cursor to an arbitrary mode and press
[Enter] establishes the input mode.
DEST SELECTION*2
DISABLE = Change of destination from the panel is
3. Enter a number to select using the ten-keys.
When [Enter] is pressed to confirm the input number,
the cursor moves to the next setting item.
When you do not want to change the default value, do
not input any number, but press [Enter].
prohibited.
ENABLE = Change of destination from the panel is
allowed.
ILLUMINATION LEVEL*3
Brightness of the button indicator : 1 (dark) to 8 (bright)
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PANEL STATUS
BKS-R3220 V1.03
STATION NUMBER 2
DISPLAY MODE
PROTECT MODE
PHANTOM PROTECT
PANEL MODE
= 1
= 2
= 1
= 1
= 1
= 1
= *
1:STATUS
2:PROMPT
2:NORMAL
MONITOR DESTINATION*3
Enter the name of the destination to be monitored (when
the MONI button is selected).
1:ON AIR
3:FLEXIBLE 4:FLEX & OA
1:PART PROT
2:FULL PROT 3:BUTTON LINK
1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER
1:TYPE + NUM. 2:BPS
3:DAUGHTER
3:KEYPAD
PANEL LAYOUT
LEVEL MODE
*:UNRELATED
1:SINGLE
2:MULTI
*:UNRELATED
*:UNRELATED
DEST SELECTION
1:DISABLE
1-8:MIN-MAX
2:ENABLE
ILLUMINATION LEVEL = 8
SOURCE OFFSET*3
0 = Use the same source as the destination to be monitored.
1 to 1023 = Use the source at the specified offset.
MONITOR DESTINATION = .......
SOURCE OFFSET
CONTROL LEVELS
= 0000
= --------
BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST
BLOCK 1 = .......
BLOCK 2 = .......
BLOCK 3 = .......
BLOCK 4 = .......
BLOCK 5 = .......
| BLOCK 6 = .......
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
CONTROL LEVELS*3
When you want to select any specific level from remote
control unit, move the cursor to the desired level and
press [Enter]. (When you want to select level-3, move
the cursor to the third “_” position and press [Enter].)
“_” = : Level selection will not be performed.
Other than “_” : A signal will be switched at the level.
When all indications show “_”, a signal is switched at
the level which is set by the primary station.
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN
Example of Setting Screen
4. Set the respective items in the same way as the steps 2
and 3.
However, set “PANEL MODE” (setting the mother
and daughters panels) as follows.
*1 : It is only applicable to BKS-R3210/R3216.
*2 : It is only applicable to BKS-R1607/R1617.
*3 : It is only applicable to BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
Mother panel :
n
1) Select “PANEL MODE = 2” (mother machine).
2) Press [Enter].
Checksum can be displayed from version V1.10 of the
BKS series.
The following contents are displayed on the setting screen.
Use checksum to check if the program data is correct,
in addition to the version number indication. (The
PGM CHECKSUM is mainly used.)
SET BLOCK NUMBER = *
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST
BLOCK 1 = .......
BLOCK 2 = .......
BLOCK 3 = .......
BLOCK 4 = .......
BLOCK 5 = .......
| BLOCK 6 = .......
The following three types of checksum are available.
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
BOOT CHECKSUM=D039
Checksum of the program area that is used for starting
up the ROM.
3) Input the unused BLOCK number of the BLOCK &
MOTHER STATION LIST into the “*” column.
4) Press [Enter] to confirm the input contents.
PGM CHECKSUM=630F
Check of the area in which the actual programs are
stored.
ROM CHECKSUM=FF68
Daughter panel :
1) Select “PANEL MODE = 3” (daughter panel).
2) Press [Enter].
Checksum of the entire ROM.
The following contents are displayed on the setting screen.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PANEL STATUS
BKS-R3210 V1.10
STATION NUMBER 6
DISPLAY MODE
PROTECT MODE
= 1
= 2
1:STATUS
1:ON AIR
2:PROMPT
2:NORMAL
MOTHER STATION ID = **
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST
BLOCK 1 = STATION 6
(The designated ID is not found)
PHANTOM PROTECT = 1
1:PART PROT
2:FULL PROT
3:BUTTON LINK
3:DAUGHTER
| BLOCK 6 = .......
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
PANEL MODE
PANEL LAYOUT
LEVEL MODE
= 1
= 2
= 1
1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER
1:TYPE + NUM. 2:DIRECT
BLOCK 2 = .......
BLOCK 3 = .......
BLOCK 4 = .......
BLOCK 5 = .......
*:UNRELATED
*:UNRELATED
*:UNRELATED
1:SINGLE
2:MULTI
DEST SELECTION = *
1:DISABLE
2:ENABLE
BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST
BLOCK 1 = .......
BLOCK 2 = .......
BLOCK 3 = .......
BLOCK 4 = .......
BLOCK 5 = .......
| BLOCK 6 = .......
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
3) Input the mother’s STATION ID number of the
BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST into the “**”
column.
BOOT CHECKSUM=D039 PGM CHECKSUM=630F ROM CHECKSUM=FF68
4) Press [Enter].
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN
When the ID number is input correctly, model name of
the mother panel appears as shown below.
Example of Setting Screen
MOTHER STATION ID = 6
(BKS-R1607)
5. Pressing [Ctrl] _ [E] switches to the menu display of
the secondary station.
Pressing [Ctrl] _ [D] returns to the menu display of
the primary station.
m
1. Various modes must be set individually on the units on
which mother panel and daughter panels are set.
2. Set the mother panel first when setting the mother
panel and daughter panel.
3. Setting of the mother panel and daughter panel is not
completed when the “PANEL MODE” setting alone is
performed.
Be sure to set the block numbers of mother panel and
to set the STATION ID (MOTHER ID) of the daugh-
ter panel side.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station
Z : SELECT CONNECTION (DVS-RS1616 only)
Z : SWITCHING FIELD (HDS-V3232 only)
Purpose
Purpose
As for DVS-RS1616, this menu is used to set, “M”
(controlling side) or “S” (controlled side) for each 9-pin
connector from 1 to 32.
This menu is used to set the crosspoint switching field of
HDS-V3232 with the control terminal.
If a controller is connected to a 9-pin connector, set to (S).
If a controlled device is connected to a 9-pin connector, set
to (M).
Setting Procedure
1. Select the menu item [Z].
2. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and the menu
screen of the secondary station will be displayed.
When setting to (S), termination is automatically made.
SWITCHING FIELD
HDS-V3232 V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
DVS-RS1616
EDITOR,
etc (M)
VTR,
etc (S)
(S)
(M)
Setting Procedure
1. Select the menu item [Z].
2. Select a input/output number using the cursor.
3. Press [Enter], the setting status changes.
(“M” → “S” → “M”)
4. Press [S] (TABLE SET), the content now appeared is
copied to the table data.
SWITCHING FIELD
FIELD
F2:FIELD
S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and the menu
screen of the secondary station will be displayed.
Example of Setting Screen
n
SELECT CONNECTION
OUTPUT (INPUT)
DVS-RS1616 V3.01 STATION NUMBER 5
INPUT
Unless pressing [S], the data will be deleted when the
power is turned off.
TERMINAL:DIRECTION TERMINAL:DIRECTION TERMINAL:DIRECTION TERMINAL:DIRECTION
01(17): M
02(18): M
03(19): M
:
09(25): M
10(26): M
11(27): M
01 : S
02 : S
03 : S
09 : S
10 : S
11 : S
:
Operating Function Key
[F2] : FIELD (Mode which sets the crosspoint switching
field)
:
:
08(24): M
16(32): M
08 : S
16 : S
1. Press [F2]. The cursor will move to “SWITCH
ING FIELD” in the menu.
S:TABLE SET
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
2. Press [Enter]. The setting will change.
(ODD → EVEN → FIELD → ASYNC → ODD)
All switching field in the switcher are deter
mined by this setting.
Example of Setting Screen
n
Unless pressing [S], the setting will be ignore.
n
To use RS-422A and S-BUS together, set the switching
field as follows.
1 When using the S-BUS and CART protocol together :
ODD
2 When using the S-BUS and PRODUCTION
SWITCHER protocol together : FIELD
Note that the switching timing of the CART will not be
accurate if the CART and PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
protocols are used together.
Switching timing is not guaranteed in the combination of
different switching fields.
For details of the signal switching timing, refer to “5-8.
Signal Switching Timing”.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-3. Setting Items of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3292B only)
5-3. Setting Items of the Primary Station
on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3292B
only)
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
Purpose
This menu is used to enable the units connected to the data
link of the monitor S-BUS to communicate.
Used for setting the units on the monitor S-BUS.
SET MONITOR FUNCTION
DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10
MODIFICATION COMMAND
F: SET SCTIVE UNIT NUMBER
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [F].
2. Select the secondary station using the cursor whose
communication will be valid.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting displayed will
change “E” → “Blank” → “E”. Only the secondary
stations displayed with “E” are valid. (“M” indicates
the primary station.)
M: SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION (COMBINED)
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Menu Screen of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS
4. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen of the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS will be dis-
played.
Setting Procedure of Monitor Function
1. Select the menu item [R] of the primary station in
order to call the menu screen of the secondary station
set as the primary station on the monitor S-BUS.
2. Select the menu item [M] to call the menu screen of
the primary station on the monitor S-BUS.
3. Set the menu item [F] and [M].
n
As the response will become slower if there are many
secondary stations, make the secondary stations not
connected invalid.
“*” indicates out of the control area.
4. Select the menu item [R] to call the secondary station
on the monitor S-BUS.
ENABLE ACTIVE UNIT FOR STATION NUMBER
DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10
5. Set each menu item on the screen.
6. Press [Ctrl] _ [Z] to return to the menu screen of the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS.
7. Set each item of all secondary stations, repeating the
procedure of step 4 to 6.
8. Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to return to the menu screen of the
primary station on the standard S-BUS.
1 2 3 4 5
+
6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 1617181920
001-020
021-040
041-060
061-080
081-100
101-120
121-140
141-160
161-180
181-200
201-220
221-240
241-254
M E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
E E E E E
n
*
*
*
*
* *
If there are multiple monitor S-BUS data links, repeat the
CTRL-E:RETURN TO MENU
procedure of step 1 to 8 for each link.
Example of Setting Screen
m
1. Station ID of the primary station is always 1 regardless
of the DIP switch setting on the CPU board.
2. Station ID of the secondary station is deter mined with
the DIP switch setting. Do not assign the same
number on two or more units as station ID on both
standard S-BUS and monitor S-BUS.
Number that can be registered as secondary s station
ID are 2 to 254.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-3. Setting Items of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3292B only)
M: SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
Purpose
Purpose
This menu is for setting the connection to use the input
monitor and output monitor in series or independently.
To monitor the input and output monitor lines using
separate monitors, set the SEPARATED mode. To
monitor them together on one monitor, set the COM-
BINED mode.
This menu is used to call the secondary station on the
monitor S-BUS.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [R].
2. Enter the station number using the numerical keys, and
press [Enter] to call it.
Setting Procedure
3. The menu screen of the secondary station on the
1. Select menu item [M].
monitor S-BUS will be displayed.
The following appears.
COMBINED : series connection
SEPARATED : independent use
2. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to display the menu screen of the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)
5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary
Station on Monitor S-BUS
(BKDS-V3293B only)
L : COPY TABLE DATA <MONITOR MENU>
Purpose
This menu is used to copy the setting contents of the
remote control unit. This is applied to BKS-R3204 and
BKS-R3205.
M: SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B + BKDS-R3292B)
Setting Procedure
SET MONITOR FUNCTION
DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10 STATION NUMBER 23
MODIFICATION COMMAND
1. Select menu item [L]. This item can be selected from
both the menu and another setting screen.
2. The message “Station Number?” will be displayed.
Enter the station number to be copied.
M: SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE INPUT=( ENABLE )OUTPUT=( ENABLE )
Ctrl-Z:RETURN
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the table data will be copied
and the screen will return to the setting screen.
When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed again, the menu screen
of the secondary station on the monitor S-BUS will be
displayed.
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B)
Purpose
This menu is used to set the input monitor and output
monitor to valid or invalid.
4. When [Ctrl] _ [Z] is pressed, menu screen of the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS will be dis-
played.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [M].
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU.
BKS-R3204 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 6
2. Select the source/destination using the cursor, and
press [Enter] to change the setting. (“ENABLE” →
“DISABLE” → “ENABLE”)
3. Press [Ctrl] _ [Z] to display the menu screen of the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS.
Station Number ?
Ctrl-Z:RETURN
Ctrl-E:MENU
Input Monitor
Input Monitor
Example of Setting Screen
65
64
1
128
1
Data set on the menu item [N : SET PANEL TABLE] are
copied.
E
E
Cascade
D
E
Output
Monitor
DVS-V6464B
Cascade
DVS-V6464B
Cascade
64
65
D
Cascade
Output
E
Monitor
DVS-V6464B
DVS-V6464B
128
E : Enable
D : Disable
n
Be sure to set the monitor line to “DISABLE” in cascade
connection.
If set to “ENABLE”, the monitor may not be performed
properly.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)
N: SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210) <MONITOR MENU>
Purpose
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R1607 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 3
This menu is used to assign source/destination name to
each source/destination selection button.
SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE)
CONTROL DESTINATION = OUT001
01 KEY=IN001
05 KEY=IN005
02 KEY=IN002
06 KEY=IN006
03 KEY=IN003
07 KEY=IN007
04 KEY=IN004
08 KEY=IN008
In the monitor mode, the button color of the remote control
unit will be green for both source and destination.
09 KEY=....... 10 KEY=....... 11 KEY=....... 12 KEY=.......
13 KEY=....... 14 KEY=....... 15 KEY=....... 16 KEY=.......
17 KEY=IN009
21 KEY=IN013
18 KEY=IN010
22 KEY=IN014
19 KEY=IN011
23 KEY=IN015
20 KEY=IN012
24 KEY=IN016
25 KEY=....... 26 KEY=....... 27 KEY=....... 28 KEY=.......
29 KEY=....... 30 KEY=....... 31 KEY=....... 32 KEY=.......
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [N].
SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
2. Select a button number using the cursor.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the name can be typed.
To delete the registration, press [Enter] before
inputting the name.
4. a) When [J : NAME STYLE (Type + Num)] is
selected in the primary station menu, input the
type name (between 0 and F) and the number for
the source and destination.
01 KEY=....... 02 KEY=....... 03 KEY=....... 04 KEY=.......
05 KEY=....... 06 KEY=....... 07 KEY=....... 08 KEY=.......
09 KEY=OUT001
13 KEY=OUT005
10 KEY=OUT002
14 KEY=OUT006
11 KEY=OUT003
15 KEY=OUT007
12 KEY=OUT004
16 KEY=OUT008
17 KEY=....... 18 KEY=....... 19 KEY=....... 20 KEY=.......
21 KEY=....... 22 KEY=....... 23 KEY=....... 24 KEY=.......
25 KEY=OUT009
29 KEY=OUT013
26 KEY=OUT010
30 KEY=OUT014
27 KEY=OUT011
31 KEY=OUT015
28 KEY=OUT012
32 KEY=OUT016
0=IN
1=OUT
2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F=....
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:Type + Num
b) Each time [Ctrl] _ [N] is pressed when [J :
NAME STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)] is selected
in the primary station menu, the following input
modes will be switched alternately.
Example of Setting Screen
m
1. Set the table data of BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206 by
eight buttons previously in the menu item [Z : SET
____ PANEL STATUS]. If “KEY = ____” is
displayed on the key number position, the name can
not be input.
2. Be sure to set either source or destination on the
respective buttons (keys) when setting the BKS-
R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210.
Description name input mode :
When “Ctrl N: Type + Num” is displayed on the
screen, it means that the name mode will be changed
to “Type + Number” by pressing [Ctrl] _ [N].
Inputs the Description name from the first to seventh
characters with alphabet and numerical keys.
“Type + Number” name input mode :
Same as a)
If both source and destination are set to the same
button (key), it will cause malfunction.
3. When setting description names to the source/destina-
tion buttons, select a name from the description name
group sent to the remote control unit.
n
If the Description name has been set for the input/output
number the display of Description has priority to the
display of “Type + Number” even if the “Type + Number”
name is input.
If other names are input, these will not be set even if
the [Enter] button is pressed.
In such cases, transfer the group including the desired
description name from the primary station.
5. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name is set.
6. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the screen will return to
the menu screen of the secondary station on the
monitor S-BUS.
When [Ctrl] _ [Z] is pressed, the screen will return to
the menu screen of the primary station on the monitor
S-BUS.
When [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed, the screen will return to
the menu screen of the primary station on the standard
S-BUS.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)
S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
<MONITOR MENU>
n
In BKS-R1607 of version V1.10 and higher, any
desired button among the sixteen buttons can be set as
a TAKE button.
Purpose
Check the groups and their names of the description names
that are transferred from the primary station.
When this setting is performed, the name selected by
the SELECTOR knob on the front panel can be taken
by pressing the TAKE button.
Check Procedure
1. Press either [Enter] or [SPACE] to view the next
page.
(Maximum inputs 512 x outputs 512)
2. Press either [BS] or [DEL] to view the previous page.
3. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
secondary station.
The actual setting procedure is as follows. Select a
key from the source side which you want to use as the
TAKE button. Press the [T] button.
Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to return to the menu screen of the
primary station.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
BKS-R1607 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 12
SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE) CONTROL DESTINATION = OUT244
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU
GROUP No. = 1
BKS-R3206 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 16
01 KEY=SRC004
05 KEY=SRC002
09 KEY=SRC009
13 KEY=.......
02 KEY=SRC005
03 KEY=SRC006
07 KEY=SRC007
11 KEY=SRC013
15 KEY=.......
04 KEY=SRC001
06 KEY=SRC003
10 KEY=SRC010
14 KEY=.......
08 KEY=SRC008
12 KEY=SRC014
16 KEY=TAKE
No. Terminal Name
Description Name
No. Terminal Name
Description Name
1 DST- 001 OUT001 London
2 DST- 002 OUT002 NewYork
3 SRC- 001 IN001
5 SRC- 003 IN003
7 SRC- 005 IN005
9 SRC- 007 IN007
Berlin
Tokyo
4 SRC- 002 IN002
6 SRC- 004 IN004
8 SRC- 006 IN006
Moscow
Cairo
SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
Berjing
Tpronto
Madrid
01 KEY=.......
05 KEY=.......
09 KEY=.......
13 KEY=OUT001
02 KEY=.......
06 KEY=.......
10 KEY=.......
14 KEY=OUT012
03 KEY=.......
07 KEY=.......
11 KEY=.......
15 KEY=OUT003
04 KEY=.......
08 KEY=.......
12 KEY=.......
16 KEY=.......
10 DST- 005 OUT005 Paris
12 DST- 012 VTR012 OUT012
14 DST- 014 VTR014 OUT014
16 DST- 016 SONY016 OUT016
18 DST- 018 VTR018 OUT018
20 DST- 020 VTR020 OUT020
22 DST- 022 VTR022 OUT022
24 DST- 024 VTR024 OUT024
26 DST- 026 VTR026 OUT026
28 DST- 028 VTR028 OUT028
30 DST- 030 VTR030 OUT030
32 DST- 032 VTR032 OUT032
34 DST- 034 VTR034 OUT034
36 DST- 036 VTR036 OUT036
38 DST- 038 VTR038 OUT038
40 DST- 040 VTR040 OUT040
11 DST- 008 OUT008 Rome
13 DST- 013 VTR013 OUT013
15 DST- 015 VTR015 OUT015
17 DST- 017 VTR017 OUT017
19 DST- 019 VTR019 OUT019
21 DST- 021 VTR021 OUT021
23 DST- 023 VTR023 OUT023
25 DST- 025 VTR025 OUT025
27 DST- 027 VTR027 OUT027
29 DST- 029 VTR029 OUT029
31 DST- 031 VTR031 OUT031
33 DST- 033 VTR033 OUT033
35 DST- 035 VTR035 OUT035
37 DST- 037 VTR037 OUT037
39 DST- 039 VTR039 OUT039
0=SRC
8=8
1=OUT
9=9
2=2
A=A
3=3
B=B
4=4
C=C
5=5
D=D
6=6
E=E
7=7
F=F
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME T:TAKE
Example of Setting Screen
Ctrl-E:MENU
Ctrl-D:RETURN
Ctrl-H:Pg-Up
Ctrl-M:Pg-Dn
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)
Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R1607/R1608/
R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210)
n
<MONITOR MENU>
In BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210 of version V1.10 and
higher, the 160 description names that are transferred from
the primary station can be registered in the range of inputs
512 x outputs 512 in the order of terminal number regard-
less of the block number. When you want to use more than
160 of the description names, transmit the names from the
primary station after dividing the description names into
Purpose
Set the various modes of the remote control unit.
Number of sources and destinations that can be controlled
from the remote control unit, can be expanded by connect-
ing multiple mother and daughter panels. Setting the
mother and daughter panels are also performed using this
menu. (Ten mother panels can be registered at the maxi-
mum.)
several blocks.
The following operations are possible from the screen.
Look at destination from source side : [*] key
Look at source from destination side : [&] key
The setting contents are as follows.
DISPLAY MODE
Return to the previous page :
Move to the next page :
[(] key
[)] key
STATUS= Displays the status of the primary station
crosspoint table.
PROMPT= The pressed buttons lit immediately.
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SOURCE
BKS-R3210 V1.10
STATION NUMBER 6
PROTECT MODE
ON AIR= Execute switching from the panel even during
the protect mode.
NORMAL= Switching is not possible during the protect
mode.
name
1 IN001
3 IN003
5 IN005
7 IN007
9 IN009
11 IN011
13 IN013
15 IN015
17 IN017
19 IN019
21 IN021
23 IN023
25 IN025
27 IN027
29 IN029
31 IN031
Description
CAM001
CAM003
VTR005
VTR007
ONAIR01
ONAIR03
STADIO1
STADIO3
MONI001
IN019
name
2 IN002
4 IN004
6 IN006
8 IN008
10 IN010
12 IN012
14 IN014
16 IN016
18 IN018
20 IN020
22 IN022
24 IN024
26 IN026
28 IN028
30 IN030
32 IN032
Description
CAM002
CAM004
VTR006
VTR008
ONAIR02
ONAIR04
STADIO2
STADIO4
MONI002
IN020
PHANTOM PROTECT
PART PROT= Execute switching on the phantom on
which protect is not set.
FULL PROT=Switching is not executed on all phantoms
when any of the phantom is set to PRO-
TECT ON.
IN021
IN022
IN023
IN024
IN025
IN026
IN027
IN028
IN029
IN030
IN031
IN032
BUTTON LINK=Switching is not executed on all
phantoms when the PROTECT button
on the panel is set to ON.
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Right:DESTINATION Left:SOURCE
Example of Setting Screen
PANEL MODE*3
STAND ALONE= Stand alone panel
MOTHER= Mother panel
DAUGHTER= Daughter panel
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU
DESTINATION
BKS-R3210 V1.10
STATION NUMBER 6
name
Description
name
Description
1 OUT001 DST001
3 OUT003 DST003
5 OUT005 DST005
7 OUT007 DST007
9 OUT009 OUT009
11 OUT011 OUT011
13 OUT013 OUT013
15 OUT015 OUT015
17 OUT017 OUT017
19 OUT019 OUT019
21 OUT021 OUT021
23 OUT023 OUT023
25 OUT025 OUT025
27 OUT027 OUT027
29 OUT029 OUT029
31 OUT031 OUT031
2 OUT002 DST002
4 OUT004 DST004
6 OUT006 DST006
8 OUT008 DST008
10 OUT010 OUT010
12 OUT012 OUT012
14 OUT014 OUT014
16 OUT016 OUT016
18 OUT018 OUT018
20 OUT020 OUT020
22 OUT022 OUT022
24 OUT024 OUT024
26 OUT026 OUT026
28 OUT028 OUT028
30 OUT030 OUT030
32 OUT032 OUT032
PANEL LAYOUT*1
TYPE + NUM.= Selecting X-Y
DIRECT= Selecting direct
LEVEL MODE*1
SINGLE= Selecting a single level
MULTI= Selecting multiple levels
DEST SELECTION*2
DISABLE=The destination change from panel is
disabled.
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Right:DESTINATION Left:SOURCE
ENABLE=The destination change from panel is enabled.
Example of Setting Screen
*1: Applicable to BKS-R3210 only.
*2: Applicable to BKS-R1607 only.
*3: When monitor S-BUS is used, select STAND ALONE= Stand alone
machine at all times since mother-daughter setting is not necessary.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)
Setting Procedure
n
1. Select menu item [Z].
Checksum can be displayed from version V1.10 of the
2. The cursor appears at “DISPLAY MODE=1.”
Move the cursor to the desired mode. (Use the keys
[(], [)].) Press [Enter] to enter the input mode.
3. Input the number to be selected using the numerical
keys.
BKS series.
Use checksum to check if the program data is correct,
in addition to the version number indication. (The
PGM CHECKSUM is mainly used.)
The following three types of checksum are available.
Press [Enter] to set the input number. The cursor
moves to the setting item.
When you want to modify the default value, press
[Enter] without inputting any number.
BOOT CHECKSUM=D039
Checksum of the program area that is used for starting
up the ROM.
PGM CHECKSUM=630F
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PANEL STATUS
BKS-R1607 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 7
Check of the area in which the actual programs are
stored.
ROM CHECKSUM=FF68
DISPLAY MODE
PROTECT MODE
= 1
= 2
1:STATUS
2:PROMPT
2:NORMAL
1:ON AIR
PHANTOM PROTECT = 1
1:PART PROT
2:FULL PROT
3:BUTTON LINK
3:DAUGHTER
Checksum of the entire ROM.
PANEL MODE
PANEL LAYOUT
LEVEL MODE
= 1
= *
= *
1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER
1:TYPE + NUM. 2:DIRECT
*:UNRELATED
*:UNRELATED
*:UNRELATED
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU
SET PANEL STATUS
BKS-R3210 V1.10
STATION NUMBER 6
1:SINGLE
2:MULTI
DEST SELECTION = 1
1:DISABLE
2:ENABLE
DISPLAY MODE
PROTECT MODE
= 1
= 2
1:STATUS
2:PROMPT
1:ON AIR
2:NORMAL
PHANTOM PROTECT = 1
1:PART PROT
2:FULL PROT
3:BUTTON LINK
3:DAUGHTER
PANEL MODE
PANEL LAYOUT
LEVEL MODE
= 1
= 2
= 1
1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER
1:TYPE + NUM. 2:DIRECT
*:UNRELATED
*:UNRELATED
*:UNRELATED
1:SINGLE
2:MULTI
BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST
DEST SELECTION = *
1:DISABLE
2:ENABLE
BLOCK 1 = .......
BLOCK 2 = .......
BLOCK 3 = .......
BLOCK 4 = .......
BLOCK 5 = .......
| BLOCK 6 = .......
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST
BLOCK 1 = .......
BLOCK 2 = .......
BLOCK 3 = .......
BLOCK 4 = .......
BLOCK 5 = .......
| BLOCK 6 = .......
| BLOCK 7 = .......
| BLOCK 8 = .......
| BLOCK 9 = .......
| BLOCK10 = .......
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN
BOOT CHECKSUM=D039 PGM CHECKSUM=630F ROM CHECKSUM=FF68
Example of Setting Screen
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-5. Backup of Setting Data
5-6. When Data is Lost
5-5. Backup of Setting Data
The data set using the control terminal will be stored in the RAM on the CPU board. It is however
recommended that the setting data be backed up just in case the data is damaged or lost.
Data can be backed up easily by using the Sony routing switcher system control software BZR-1000 (run
with a IBM PC/AT or compatible machine) or BZR-10.
5-6. When Data is Lost
DVS-V3232B/V6464B
If the LED (D7) on the CPU board is not lit even if the error No. indicator shows “00” when operations
are being checked, it means that all the data set have been lost.
The first thing to do is to check the setting of COR1 on the CPU board.
OFF : Set to ON position.
ON : The lithium battery (BT1) may be defective.
Measure voltage across BT1. If it is 2V or less, replace it with the new one.
Consult with your Sony Sales Representative for replacement of battery.
Next, initialize the unit as following procedures.
1. Set the COR1 on the CPU-149 board to ON.
2. Set the test switch (S3) to “D” and press the reset switch (S5).
3. Set the test switch (S3) to “0” and press the reset switch (S5).
4. Call the menu screen on the control terminal and execute the menu item [T : SET CLOCK].
BKPF-R70
If the LED (D2) on the CPU board is not lit even if the error No. indicator shows “00” when operations
are being checked, it means that all the data set have been lost.
The lithium battery (BT1) may be defective.
Measure voltage across BT1. If it is 2V or less, replace it with the new one (CR-2025).
Consult with your Sony Sales Representative for replacement of battery.
HDS-V3232
If the LED (D13) on the CPU board is not lit even if the error No. indicator shows “00” when operations
are being checked, it means that all the data set have been lost.
The first thing to do is to check the setting of the CN5 on the CPU board.
OFF : Set to ON position.
ON : The lithium battery (BT1) may be defective.
Measure voltage across BT1. If it is 2V or less, replace it with the new one.
Consult with your Sony Sales Representative for replacement of battery.
Next, initialize the unit as following procedures.
1. Set the COR1 on the CPU-251 board to ON.
2. Set the test switch (S2) to “D” and press the reset switch (S8).
3. Set the test switch (S2) to “0” and press the reset switch (S8).
4. Call the menu screen on the control terminal and execute the menu item [T : SET CLOCK].
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-7. Initialization of Table Data
5-7. Initialization of Table Data
There are five ways of initializing the table data. Note that the way to be used depends on which item is
initialized.
5-7-1. Initializing Procedure and Corresponding Items
DVS-V3232B/V6464B :
Initializing Procedure
Corresponding Menu Items
1
2
3
1. Set the test switch (S3) on the CPU-149 board to “D”.
2. Press the reset switch (S5).
All items of the primary and secondary stations.
1. Set the test switch (S3) on the CPU-149 board to “C”.
2. Press the reset switch (S5).
[W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
Select the menu item [K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE]
of the primary station and press [Y].
All items of the primary station excluding the
following 4 items.
. [H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM]
. [N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP]
. [O : SET TIE LINES]
. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
4
5
Select the menu item [K : reset To default table]
of the secondary station and press [Y].
All items of the secondary station excluding
the crosspoint data.
Select the menu item [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL] [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL]
of the secondary station and press [F2] (DEFAULT).
BKPF-R70 :
Initializing Procedure
Corresponding Menu Items
1
2
3
1. Set the test switch (S5) on the CPU-256 board to “D”.
2. Press the reset switch (S1).
All items of the primary and secondary stations.
1. Set the test switch (S5) on the CPU-256 board to “C”.
2. Press the reset switch (S1).
[W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
Select the menu item [K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE]
of the primary station and press [Y].
All items of the primary station excluding the
following 4 items.
. [H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM]
. [N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP]
. [O : SET TIE LINES]
. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
4
5
Select the menu item [K : reset To default table]
of the secondary station and press [Y].
All items of the secondary station excluding
the crosspoint data.
Select the menu item [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL] [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL]
of the secondary station and press [F2] (DEFAULT).
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-7. Initialization of Table Data
HDS-V3232 :
Initializing Procedure
Corresponding Menu Items
1
2
3
1. Set the test switch (S2) on the CPU-251 board to “D”.
2. Press the reset switch (S8).
All items of the primary and secondary stations.
1. Set the test switch (S2) on the CPU-251 board to “C”.
2. Press the reset switch (S8).
[W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
Select the menu item [K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE]
of the primary station and press [Y].
All items of the primary station excluding the
following 4 items.
. [H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM]
. [N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP]
. [O : SET TIE LINES]
. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
4
5
Select the menu item [K : reset To default table]
of the secondary station and press [Y].
All items of the secondary station excluding
the crosspoint data.
Select the menu item [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL] [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL]
of the secondary station and press [F2] (DEFAULT).
n
The primary station of HDS-V3232 does not have the menu item[S].
The secondary station of the menu item [Z] of [SWITCHING FIELD] only.
5-7-2. Default Values Initialization
Item
Default Value
Primary station
[B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE]
TYPE : 0=IN, 1=OUT, 2-F=None
NAME : IN001-IN512, OUT001-OUT512
[E : SET LEVEL TABLE]
All levels of all destination is ENABLE
Level name : 1, 2, 3....7, 8
[F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER]
DVS-V3232B : STATION 2-33 ENABLE
DVS-V6464B : STATION 2-65 ENABLE
[H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM]
[J : NAME STYLE]
Not set
Type + Num (“Type + Number” name mode)
Physical location number=Virtual location number
Not set
[L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT]
[M : SET INHIBIT TABLE]
[N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP]
[O : SET TIE LINES]
[P : CHANGE PASSWORD]
[S : SELECT INDICATION COLOR]
[U : SELECT CONTROL MODE]
[V : SELECT WARNING DISPLAY]
[W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
OFF
All channels : DIRECT
OFF
NO LOG
[Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE]
All STATION : OFF
No OFFSET
Secondary station [A : SET UNIT LOCATION ]
[U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL]
[Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT]
The input /output number is 1:1.
4:2:2, SWITCHING FIELD=FIELD
The input/output number is 1:1.
Crosspoint data
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8. Signal Switching Timing
5-8. Signal Switching Timing
For DVS-V3232B/V6464B and HDS-V3232, a SWITCHING FIELD which switch signals from the control terminal can
be set. The SWITCHING FIELD are set using menu item “Z” of the secondary station and any SWITCHING FIELD
mode (ODD, EVEN, FIELD, ASYNC) can be selected.
The signal switching timing depends on whether it is controlled by RS-422A or the S-BUS.
The following shows the timing charts of RS-422A and S-BUS for each SWITCHING FIELD mode.
. When SWITCHING FIELD “EVEN” is set
RS-422A
Switching Command Switching Executed
S-BUS
Switching Command Switching Executed
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
Switching Command
ODD EVEN
Switching Executed
ODD EVEN
Switching Command
Switching Executed
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
. When SWITCHING FIELD “ODD” is set
RS-422A
S-BUS
Switching Executed
Switching Command
ODD
Switching Executed
Switching Command
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
Switching Command
ODD EVEN ODD
Switching Executed
EVEN ODD
Switching Command
Switching Executed
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
. When SWITCHING FIELD “FIELD” is set
RS-422A
S-BUS
Switching Executed
Switching Command
ODD
Switching Executed
Switching Command
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
Switching Command
ODD EVEN
Switching Executed
ODD EVEN
Switching Command
Switching Executed
ODD
EVEN
ODD
EVEN
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4
. When SWITCHING FIELD “ASYNC” is set
The signals will be switched immediately after the switching command is received regardless of the control method and
protocol used.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6
Confirmation of function
6-1. Outline
After the hardware and software have been set up, it is necessary to check if the system is working
properly before starting the operation.
Each routing switcher is equipped with the self-diagnosis function to check the system connection and
status of each unit. As soon as the power of the unit is supplied or the system is reset, this function begins
operations which check internal conditions and connections automatically. When a fault is detected, this
is immediately displayed via the following four methods.
1. Status indicator
2. System status screen (*)
3. Error No. indicator
4. LEDs on the boards
Moreover, the test mode and ISR function are available to find out the detail of error and cause.
This section outlines the checks performed when the system is started up, and describes error messages
displayed on [2. System status screen] in detail.
For details of [1. Status indicator], [3. Error No. indicator] and ISR function, refer to the operation manual
or maintenance manual provided with the unit. For [4. LEDs on the boards] and [Test mode], refer to the
maintenance manual.
* : The error messages displayed in [2. System Status Screen] are valid only when the control terminal is connected to the primary
station in the S-BUS control system.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2. Function Check Format
6-2. Function Check Format
The contents of each function and the structure of the error displays are as follows.
LED Display for Internal
Information
Test Mode Function
Test mode is effective for finding the
causes of the error and the faulty
sections which have been detected by
the self-diagnosis function. It checks
LEDs,switches and signal circuit using
a rotary switch on CPU board.
LED displays the presence/absence of
the signals and setting of the switches
independently, irrespective of the self-
diagnosis and test mode.
LEDs on Board
Error No. Indicator*1
Function Check
Error No. Indicator*1
Status Indicator*1
Contorl Terminal (System Status Screen)
Error Information When
Error Messages
Power ON
Status Display *1
Error Codes*1
Self-diagnosis Function
The self-diagnosis function of the routing switcher checks/judges hardware problem,
disconnected wires, the conditon of the sync signal, the execution of the backup function,
the communication errors,etc.
*1 : HDS-V3232 does not have run diagnostics check on Status indicator and Error No. indicator.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-3. How the Self-Diagnosis Items are Related
6-3. How the Self-Diagnosis Items are Related
Status Indicator *1
Error No. Indicator*1
Control Terminal Display
Lit in Green:
00 Operating normally
Operating Normally
Blinking in Green:
Faulty sync signal detection
Faulty sync signal detection
Faulty crosspoint hardware
6 * Faulty sync signal detection
Blinking in Red:
Faulty crosspoint
hardware
4 * Faulty crosspoint hardware
7 * Increase in the switcher's
internal temperature/Fan has
stopped
Increase in the switcher's internal
temperature/Fan has stopped
Increase in the switcher's
internal temperature/Fan
has stopped
2 * Communication error of the
REMOTE 1 connector (BNC)
/S-BUS
S-BUS deta link has
disconnected
S-BUS deta link has been disconnected
Communication trouble of the
primary statiom
Other errors
Communication error with a
secondary station
8 * ROM/RAM/EEPROM check
ROM/RAM/EEPROM check error
Re-start display
error or table deta reading error
1 * Communication error of the
REMOTE 2 connector (9-pin)
/RS-422A
Display of the input/output board
insertion
3 * Communication error of the
REMOTE 3 connector (25-pin)
/RS-232C
5 * Incorrect setting data of the
backup memory
Start-up of backup power supply
Start-up of backup CPU board
Lit in Red:
Start-up of backup unit
FF Malfunction of CPU board
*1 : HDS-V3232 does not have run diagnostics check on Status indicator and Error No. indicator.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4. Diagnosis Items for Each Model
6-4. Diagnosis Items for Each Model
Self-diagnosis Items
Error Display
Model
*1Status
Status
*1Error No. DVS-V1616 DVS-V3232B DVS-A3232 DVS-R1616
Indicator
display
Indicator
DVS-V6464B
HDS-V3232
DVS-TC3232
BVS-V323
BVS-A3232
Checking normal operations
Detecting sync signals
Detecting the sync signals
of the timing generator
Sync signal lock function
of the timing generator
OK/NG of crosspoint
hardware
O
O
_
_
O
O
O
O
O
_
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
O
_
O
_
_
_
O
O
O
O
_
_
_
O
O
O
O
_
_
O
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
_
Unit’s internal temperature/
Fan’s driving condition
Detecting disconnection in
the S-BUS data link
Communicating condition with
Secondary stations
ROM/RAM/EEPROM check
Re-start display
_
_
_
O
O
O
O
_
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O*2
Display of input/output
board insertion
_
Display of input/output
board no-insertion
_
_
_
O
_
_
O
O
O
O*2
_
O
O
O
O
O
O
Communicating condition
of REMOTE2/RS-422A
Communicating condition
of REMOTE3/RS-232C
Backup memory setting data
Set-up of backup power
supply
O
O
_
_
_
_
O
_
O
_
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Start-up back-up CPU board
CPU board operations
Timer stop
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
O
_
_
_
_
O
O
O
O
O
_
O
O
_
*1 : HDS-V3232 does not have run diagnostics check on Status indicator and Error No. indicator.
*2 : HDS-V3232 is valid only when has been not inserted the input/output board, when input/output board insertion/no-
insertion will be displayed.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-5. Function Check Process
6-5. Function Check Process
After installing the hardware and software of the routing switcher system, check its functions and those of
each device according to the following procedures. The process of the function check consists of three
steps. The checks in step 2 and onward will be performed only when errors have been detected in step 1.
If not, the checking process ends there. When errors have been displayed in step 1, except the cases that
causes are found with the display contents, it is necessary to find out the faulty sections and causes by
performing the checks from step 2. Countermeasures and the methods of fixing the errors are described in
detail in the operation manuals and maintenance manuals provided. For the counter-measures and reme-
dies, refer to the operation manual or the maintenance manual supplied with the unit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turn on the power of the S-BUS data link unit
Check the status indicator
STEP1
Normal
Check the system status screen
Check the menu screen
STEP2
Open the front panel
Check the LED displays
on the board
Counter-
measures
Check the error code
(As repuired)
STEP3
Execute the test mode
Completion of function check
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal
6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal
There are two types of display modes for operation check from control terminal, which can be selected
depending upon the purpose. The first type of display mode is provided by the system status display and
the other is provided by the “W” menu on the menu display.
The system status display shows result of self diagnostics that is performed automatically by the primary
station when the main power of the system is turned on. It also shows error messages that are issued by
the respective stations on the S-BUS data link in real time, enabling to use the system status display as the
monitor of system operation during system run.
To check the old system status, call the menu item [W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG].
This menu takes out only the system status from the memory, and displays error messages, corresponding
station and time of occurrence.
n
As the control terminal constantly checks the errors of the system, and is capable of recording/displaying
these, it is extremely effective for monitoring the operations of the system. Therefore, it is recommended
to connect this control terminal after completing initial settings.
6-6-1. System status screen after power on
When the power of the primary station is turned on, the results of the self-diagnosis of the primary station
and the ROM checksum value, will be displayed as shown in the figure below.
If the result of the self-diagnosis is normal, “OK” will be displayed for this item. If errors have been
detected, the corresponding item will be the reversal characters.
SONY Digital Routing System DVS-V6464B V2.10
ITEM
ROM CHECK SUM
8A65
OK
1
2
3
4
5
RAM READ AND WRITE
REFERENCE SIGNAL
S-BUS LINK TERMINATE
REAL TIME CLOCK
OK
OK
STARTED
1993.02.03-22.15 STARTED BY DVS-V6464B Ver2.10 IN STATION 1
1993.02.03-22.15 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED TO CHANNEL B
1993.02.03-22.15 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
1993.02.03-22.15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 1
Example of the System Status Screen After Power On
Display Contents:
1 ROM checksum value on the CPU board of the primary station.
2 Condition of the reading/writing operations of the RAM in the primary station.
3 The result of detecting the reference signal in the primary station.
4 Presence of the 75 Z termination in the S-BUS data link.
5 Oscillation of the real time clock IC.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal
6-6-2. System status screen during the system operation
When a message is output to the S-BUS data link, the system status screen will display this message with
the date and time of occurrence. When an error occurs during the operation of the system, the error
message will be displayed.
1990.10.12-15:42 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED
Error message
1990.10.27-09:28 STARTED BY BKS-R1601 Ver3.10 IN STATION 11
1990.11.03-05:31 STARTED BY BKS-R3204 Ver3.11 IN STATION 32
1991.01.14-13:51 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
Error message
1991.02.01-11:15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 4
1991.02.04-06:11 X-POINT ERROR IN STATION 1
Example of System Status Screen During System Operation
6-6-3. Menu item [W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
On the other hand, the menu item [W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG] can be used to call all the error informa-
tion stored in the RAM of the primary station, such as the content and time of errors in each station and
on the S-BUS circuit.
Operating procedure:
1. Turn on the power supply of the primary station to automatically start up the system status screen.
2. Press [Ctrl] _ [X] to display the menu screen.
The password will be requested if it has been set. Input the password using the numerical and alpha-
bet keys, and press [Return] or [Enter] .
3. Select the menu item [W].
4. “__ more __” will be displayed at the bottom of the screen if all error contents cannot be displayed
on a screen.
Press [SPACE] to display the next error content. “__ end __” will be displayed when all error
contents have been displayed.
5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen.
6. Press [Ctrl] _ [X] to return to the system status screen.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal
6-6-4. Contents and countermeasures of the error messages
The control terminal will display eleven types of error messages according to the error content.
However, depending on the model, some are not used because of no detection, or some part of the
message may differ. For details of the messages and their countermeasures, refer to operation manuals
provided with each model.
Standard error messages and their countermeasures are as follows.
X-POINT ERROR IN STATION * * *
Content :
Faulty crosspoint hardware
As a result of comparing the presence/absence of the crosspoint signal in the station
being displayed, this message will be displayed if the input signal was found to be
present without the output signal, and vice versa, or if the input/output board has not
been inserted correctly.
Countermeasure : The crosspoint of station * * * is faulty. Check the input/output board has been
properly installed.
TEMPERATURE RISE OR FAN STOP IN STATION * * *
Content :
This message is displayed when the temperature inside of the station being displayed
has risen, or when the fan has stopped.
Countermeasure : Promptly turn off the power supply of station * * *, and check for short-circuits,
power leakage, faults of the mechanical parts surrounding the fan, etc.
MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION * * *
Content :
This message is displayed when the SYNC/ASYNC select switch on the CPU board of
the switcher has been set to the sync switching mode (SYNC), and the reference video
signal has not been input to the REF IN connector.
Countermeasure : Connect the sync signal to the REF IN connector of station * * *.
n
Set the SYNC/ASYNC select switch to “ASYNC” if the reference signal is not present. When the
reference signal is not input in the sync switching mode (SYNC), the crosspoint is switched automatically
as the async switching mode (ASYNC).
CHANGED OVER TO BACKUP POWER SUPPLY IN STATION * * *
Content :
This message is displayed when the power supply output during operations has
dropped and it is changed over to the backup power supply.
Countermeasure : Remove the faulty power supply of station * * *, and repair or replace it with a new
one.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal
DIFFERENT CHECK SUM= ???? IN STATION
*
*
*
Check sun value
Content :
This message is displayed when an error has been detected as the result of ROM
checksum and RAM writing tests performed after resetting the unit.
Countermeasure : Replace the corresponding ROM.
n
This error message will be displayed even after the ROM has been replaced. This is normal. Execute the
menu item [J: RECALL MAIN TABLE] from the control terminal, and reset the corresponding unit once
again for the unit to begin operating normally.
S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED
Content :
This message is displayed when the S-BUS data link has been disconnected some-
where.
Countermeasure : Check the connections between the S-BUS line and each station, and check that unused
S-BUS ports or the ends of S-BUS lines have been terminated with 75 Z. One method
to search for the disconnected sections is using the menu item [R: CALL SECOND-
ARY STATION] and checking for responses.
n
Be sure to terminate unused S-BUS ports with 75 Z. When a disconnection has been detected, the
primary station automatically performs 75 Z termination and restarts communication with the stations
just before the disconnection. In this case, some stations may not be able to communicate even though
they are connected.
CHANGED OVER TO BACKUP CPU IN STATION * * *
Content :
This message is displayed when an error has occurred in the CPU board during opera-
tions, and it is changed over to the backup CPU board.
Countermeasure : Remove the main CPU board, and repair or replace it with a new one.
STARTED BY * * * _ * * * * * Ver *.* * IN STATION * * *
Content :
This message is displayed when the switcher is restarted due to instantaneous power
failure, etc., or when the power supply is turned ON.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal
STATION * * * FAILURE(DISCONNECTED OR POWER DOWN)
Content :
This message is displayed when communication with the station set at the menu item
[F] is stopped.
Countermeasure : Check the status indicator of station * * *, and perform the adjustment corresponding
to the symptom.
VALID INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD IN STATION * * *
Content :
Content :
This message is displayed when the input/output board has been inserted to station * * *.
INVALID INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD IN STATION * * *
This message is displayed when the input/output board has been removed from * * *.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7
Change Information on DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series
and DVS-V3232M/V6464M
7-1. Outline (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)
The S-BUS protocol is extended of its virtual matrix size from 512 to 1024.
At the same time the following functions are changed.
. Number of SOURCE/DEST TYPEs is extended from 16 to 32.
. Selection of either 1024 x 1024 x 8 level or 1024 x 512 x 16 level is added.
. Number of the GLOBAL PHANTOM is reduced from 4093 to 2800.
. The multi source assignment function is added.
. Number of DESCRIPTION NAME is extended from 1024 to 2048.
. Number of the Tie Line signals is increased from 4 to 255.
In the following description, the product that supports the virtual matrix size 512 is called the S-BUS P1
type, and the product that supports the virtual matrix size 1024 is called the S-BUS P2 type.
The S-P2 has the higher compatibility with the S-P1 but has the several limitations.
The S-P2 is realized by extending the type number of the terminal name from 16 to 32, and by changing
the data structure of the terminal names. The 16 types of the terminal number data that are used in the S-
P1, do not have compatibility with the 32 types of terminal number data that are used in the S-P2. There-
fore, the S-P2 has two types of data i.e., both the 16 type data and the 32 type data for each terminal of
terminal number 1 to 512. The 16 type data needs to be used for the terminal numbers of 1 to 512 when
the S-P1 UMD and the remote control panel are used in the system. The 32 type data needs to be used for
the terminal numbers of 513 to 1024.
When all of the UMD and the remote control panel within the system is of the S-P2 type, the terminal
numbers of 1 to 512 must be set to the 32 type data.
When use of the remote control panels of the S-P1 and S-P2 types are mixed, use of the S-P1 remote
control panel is limited within the range of terminal numbers from 1 to 512. In such a case, the S-P2
remote control panel can handle the 32 type data with the terminal numbers of 513 to 1024.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)
7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)
n
The menu screen shown below is based on the DVS-128.
Initial screen (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)
When the [Ctrl] _ [X] key is pressed after the main power is turned on, the following display appears.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU
DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
MODIFICATION COMMAND
A: DISPLAY CONTROL AREA
C: SET DESTINATION NAME
E: SET LEVEL TABLE
B: SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
D: SET SOURCE NAME
F: SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
H: SET GLOBAL PHANTOM
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
J: NAME STYLE(Type + Num)
M: SET INHIBIT TABLE
L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT
N: SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP
Q: CHANGE CROSSPOINT
O: SET TIE LINES
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
S: SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT
MAINTENANCE COMMAND
P: CHANGE PASSWORD
T: SET CLOCK
U: SELECT CONTROL MODE
X: DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION
W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG
Z: SET UNIT DETECTABLE
Ctrl-X/B:QUIT SETUP MENU
Example of Initial Screen
Changed item
. [K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE] is deleted from the primary station screen and is moved to the
secondary station screen.
When [K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE] is executed on the secondary station screen, the partial
initialization is executed in the S-P1, but is changed so that all data including the works is reset to the
default data when shipped from the factory.
. [S: SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT] is newly added.
. The [Ctrl] _ [B] key is added as the key input to return to the initial menu (the screen when the main
power is turned on.) The [Ctrl] _ [B] key has the same function as the [Ctrl] _ [X].
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)
A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA
(DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)
B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
(DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)
Purpose
Purpose
This menu displays the control size as the primary station.
This menu is used to set the type name of the source
destination and global phantom table.
The menu makes the management of source/destination
easier.
DISPLAY CONTROL AREA
SOURCE No 0001-1024
DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
DESTINATION No 0001-1024 LEVEL 1-8
The alphanumeric characters of 4 characters or less can be
used. Either 16 type data or the 32 type data can be
selected for the terminal numbers of 1 to 512.
SOURCE/DEST/PHANTOM TYPE
DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
TYPE:32
0=IN
1=OUT
2=....
A=....
I=....
Q=....
3=....
B=....
J=....
R=....
4=....
C=....
K=....
S=....
5=....
D=....
L=....
T=....
6=....
E=....
M=....
U=....
7=....
F=....
N=....
V=....
8=....
G=....
O=....
9=....
H=....
P=....
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Display Screen
When LEVEL: 1 to 16 on the [E: SET LEVEL TABLE]
screen is set to 1, the message [SOURCE No. 0001-1024
DESTINATION No. 0001-0512 LEVEL 1-16] appears.
There are no input items or set items on this screen.
F1:TYPE
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
. Every pressing of [F1:TYPE] triggers between TYPE:
16 and TYPE: 32. Either one of the data structures of
the terminal name to be handed by the S-P1, is selected.
. When [F1] is pressed, the message [Do you change the
type number? Y or N] appears. When either [Y] or [N]
is pressed, change the setting of the type number.
The terminal name from 1 to 512
. TYPE : 16 The names up to 16 types can be used.
When the S-P1 type remote control panel
or the UMD is used in the system, select
the TYPE 16.
. TYPE : 32 The names up to 32 types can be used.
When the S-P1 type remote control panel
or the UMD is used in the system, the
correct display or correct operation
cannot be performed.
The terminal names of No. 513 to 1024 are fixed to type
32 without affected by this setting.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)
E : SET LEVEL TABLE
O : SET TIE LINES (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)
(DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)
Purpose
Purpose
Change/addition/deletion of the TIE LINE data are per-
formed here.
The level name can be set, and the valid level for each
output terminal can be set.
Number of levels of either 8 or 16 can also be selected.
SET TIE LINES
DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
--PATHS 1------------------------------------------------------------------
SOURCE: SOURCE No.
DESTINETION No.
ROUTE:
SOURCE No.
0081 - 0082 0080 - 0086
DESTINETION No.
0083 - 0089 0100 - 0130
--PATHS 2------------------------------------------------------------------
DESTINETION No.
LEVEL TABLE
DVS-128 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 1
L1 0001 - 0080 0001 - 0004
L2
LEVEL:1-16
DESTINATION:SOURCE No.
L1
1=VIT
2=A1
3=A2
4=TC
5=REM
6=B32 7=.... 8=....
9=.... 10=.... 11=.... 12=.... 13=.... 14=.... 15=.... 16=....
No. out
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
VIT
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
TC
REM
....
....
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
B32
....
....
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
B32
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
SOURCE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
ROUTE:
SOURCE No.
.... - .... .... - ....
DESTINETION No.
0200 - 0201 0300 - 0400
--PATHS 3------------------------------------------------------------------
DESTINETION No.
0001 OUT001
0002 OUT002
0003 OUT003
0004 OUT004
0005 OUT005
0006 OUT006
0007 OUT007
0008 OUT008
0009 OUT009
0010 OUT010
0011 OUT011
0012 OUT012
0013 OUT013
0014 OUT014
0015 OUT015
0016 OUT016
0017 OUT017
....
....
A2
....
....
TC
L2 0001 - 0040 0005 - 0006
L.
DESTINATION:SOURCE No.
L1
A2
TC
A2
TC
SOURCE: SOURCE No.
DESTINETION No.
ROUTE:
SOURCE No.
.... - .... .... - ....
DESTINETION No.
.... - .... .... - ....
--PATHS 4------------------------------------------------------------------
DESTINETION No.
A2
TC
L. .... - .... .... - ....
L.
A2
TC
DESTINATION:SOURCE No.
L.
A2
TC
A2
TC
A2
TC
SOURCE: SOURCE No.
DESTINETION No.
ROUTE:
L.
SOURCE No.
DESTINETION No.
A2
TC
L.
.... - .... .... - ....
.... - .... .... - ....
A2
TC
DESTINATION:SOURCE No.
L.
DESTINETION No.
A2
TC
.... - .... .... - ....
A2
TC
A2
TC
F1:PgUp F2:PgDn
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
A2
TC
A2
TC
Example of Setting Screen
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:LEVEL
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
To set the number, press [Enter] to be ready for number
input. Enter a number in the range of 1 to 1024. When
[Enter] is pressed again, the number is set, the range is
checked and duplication of the same number with other
setting is checked. Then the number is set.
Example of Setting Screen
Every pressing of [F3:LEVEL] toggles between the
LEVEL: 1-8 display and the LEVEL: 1-16 display on the
2 nd line.
The LEVEL 9-16 is realized by switching the Destination
to which 512 is added, at the same time.
When the system is used with the LEVEL 1-16, the remote
control panel that supports the LEVEL 1-16 becomes
necessary.
If duplication of the number is found, the entered number
becomes invalid and the former number remains as it is.
To delete a terminal number, press [Enter] without
inputting a numbers. Then “....” appears and the terminal
number is deleted.
Number of the signals to be set is 254 at the maximum.
Number of the TIE LINEs to be set is 16 paths at the
maximum.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)
(Example)
An example in which the three matrices of 10 x 10 are used and are connected by the Tie-Line, is shown.
A signal of IN 1-10 and IN 13-20 can be selected from OUT 21-30 in this example.
SET TIE LINES
DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
--PATHS 1------------------------------------------------------------------
SOURCE: SOURCE No.
DESTINETION No.
ROUTE:
SOURCE No.
0011 - 0012 0017 - 0018
DESTINETION No.
0021 - 0022 0021 - 0030
--PATHS 2------------------------------------------------------------------
DESTINETION No.
L1 0001 - 0010 0009 - 0010
L2
DESTINATION:SOURCE No.
L1
SOURCE: SOURCE No.
DESTINETION No.
ROUTE:
L.
SOURCE No.
DESTINETION No.
L2 0013 - 0020 0019 - 0020
.... - .... .... - ....
DESTINATION:SOURCE No.
L1
DESTINETION No.
0023 - 0024 0021 - 0030
Example of Setting Screen
1
1
10
~
10
1
1
13
20
~
10 x 10
8
8
9
10
LEVEL 1
20
11
12 11 13
11
16
25
31
16
10 x 10
17
18
19
20
LEVEL 2
24 23 22 21 25
31
21
21
10 x 10
30
30
LEVEL 1
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)
7-3. Changed Menu
(Secondary Station Setting Items)
S : SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT
(DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)
Purpose
N : SET PANEL TABLE (HDS-X3400)
Change/addition/deletion of the MULTIPLE SOURCE
name are performed here. When the signal name that has
been set as level 1 from the remote control, is supposed to
be named as TAKE, the signals whose source numbers are
set here, can be selected in the level 2 and later.
Purpose
This menu is used to set the switch of the BKS-R3400
(panel switch).
Setting procedure
1. Select the menu item “N”.
SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT
DVS-128 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 1
VID
A-A1
IN001
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN005
IN006
M1
A-A2
A3
A4
REM
TBC
SAPS
2. Select the desired button number using the cursor.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the machine enters the channel
number input mode. The input mode is canceled if [Enter]
is pressed before inputting the channel number in step 4.
4. Input the channel number of 1 to 16 from the keyboard.
The input channel is input by entering a number to the table
of the SOURCE side, and the output channel is input by
entering a number to the table of the DESTINATION side.
5. Press [Enter] to set the input setting.
0001 IN001
0002 IN002
0003 IN003
0004 IN004
0005 IN005
0006 IN006
0007 C1
IN001
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN005
IN006
IN001
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN005
IN006
IN001
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN005
IN006
IN001
IN002
IN003
IN004
IN005
IN006
IN001
IN002
IN003
IN004
IN005
IN006
IN001
IN002
IN003
IN004
IN005
IN006
....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
0008 C2
M1
0009 C3
M2
0010 C4
M3
0011 C5
M1
0012 IN012
0013 IN013
0014 IN014
0015 IN015
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
IN012
IN013
IN014
IN015
6. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
secondary station.
0=IN
8=CG
G=17
O=25
1=OUT
9=SAT
2=VTR
3=ENG
4=MCR
5=TEST
D=GPHA
L=22
6=SNG
E=GPHB
M=23
7=SS
A=LMS
I=19
Q=27
B=EDIT
J=20
C=CAM
K=21
S=29
F=GPHC
N=24
H=18
P=26
R=28
T=30
U=31
V=32
SET PANEL TABLE
HDS-X3400 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 1
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE)
01 KEY=001
02 KEY=002
03 KEY=003
04 KEY=004
Example of Setting Screen
06 KEY=006
07 KEY=007
08 KEY=008
05 KEY=005
10 KEY=010
11 KEY=011
12 KEY=012
09 KEY=009
14 KEY=014
15 KEY=015
16 KEY=016
13 KEY=013
The SOURCE name of LEVEL 1 is fixed in the same way
as the source name setting. The SOURCE names of the
LEVEL-2 to 8 are set using this screen.
18 KEY=· · · · · · ·
22 KEY=· · · · · · ·
26 KEY=· · · · · · ·
30 KEY=· · · · · · ·
19 KEY=· · · · · · ·
23 KEY=· · · · · · ·
27 KEY=· · · · · · ·
31 KEY=· · · · · · ·
20 KEY=· · · · · · ·
24 KEY=· · · · · · ·
28 KEY=· · · · · · ·
32 KEY=· · · · · · ·
17 KEY=· · · · · · ·
21 KEY=· · · · · · ·
25 KEY=· · · · · · ·
29 KEY=· · · · · · ·
Set the name by entering the Type number first then by
entering the successive three digit number. This name can
be deleted using [Ctrl] _ [P]. If an illegal name is set, a
message [The name is not defined] appears, the original
name is resumed. When a valid SOURCE name has
already been input, the name is set, the correspond
SOURCE number is internally saved and the cursor moves
to the next position.
SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
02 KEY=· · · · · · ·
03 KEY=· · · · · · ·
07 KEY=· · · · · · ·
11 KEY=· · · · · · ·
15 KEY=· · · · · · ·
19 KEY=003
04 KEY=· · · · · · ·
08 KEY=· · · · · · ·
12 KEY=· · · · · · ·
16 KEY=· · · · · · ·
20 KEY=004
01 KEY=· · · · · · ·
05 KEY=· · · · · · ·
09 KEY=· · · · · · ·
13 KEY=· · · · · · ·
17 KEY=001
06 KEY=· · · · · · ·
10 KEY=· · · · · · ·
14 KEY=· · · · · · ·
18 KEY=002
22 KEY=006
23 KEY=007
24 KEY=008
21 KEY=005
26 KEY=010
27 KEY=011
28 KEY=012
25 KEY=009
30 KEY=014
31 KEY=015
32 KEY=016
29 KEY=013
3
LED BRIGHTNESS LEVEL(1-8)
F1:TABLE F2:LED
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
When “Enter” is pressed without entering name, “....”
appears and the setting is deleted.
Example of Setting Screen
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (DVS-128)
Purpose
Purpose is to display the internal status of the equipment.
There are no setting on this screen.
Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
secondary station.
Operating Function Keys
[F1] : TABLE (Mode which assigns source and destina-
tion to the buttons)
DISPLAY UNIT STATUS
DVS-128 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 1
This setting is valid for local input/output physical ter-
minals of the HDS-X3400. The SOURCE and DESTI-
NATION of other unit cannot be set from this button.
[F2] : LED (Mode which adjusts brightness of the button.)
1. Press [F2]. The cursor moves to [LED
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL (1-8)] on the screen.
2. Press any key of 1 to 8 from the keyboard.
Brightness of the buttons will change accord-
ingly. (dark 1 ↔ 8 bright)
INPUT BOARD
01-32
MAIN
CONNECTOR
VALID
STYLE
REFERENCE
VALID
Analog Video
Analog Audio
Digital Audio
------------
A
B
B
-
33-64
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
65-96
97-128
OUTPUT BOARD
01-32
MAIN
CONNECTOR
VALID
STYLE
REFERENCE
VALID
Analog Video
Analog Audio
Digital Audio
------------
A
B
B
-
33-64
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
65-96
97-128
A
B
CONTROL BOARD
REFERENCE SIGNAL
SELECT FIELD
525
625
MAIN S-BUS MONITOR
V1.00 V1.00 V1.00
INVALID
FIELD
ON
ODD
n
M
B
POWER SUPPLIES
INVALID
The BKS-R3400 directly controls only the connected
HDS-X3400 regardless of the setting of the primary
station, that is different from other remote control units.
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3
ROT
ROT
ROT
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Display Screen
Description of contents on display
MAIN or CONNECTOR : VALID/INVALID
Displays whether the board (MAIN) to be inserted from
the front and the rear connector board, are inserted or not.
STYLE : Analog Video/Analog Audio/Digital Audio
Displays the name of the optional signals that are inserted
to each option slot.
REFERENCE : A/B
Displays which of the two types of the reference signal, is
selected.
REFERENCE SIGNAL : 525/625
Displays the number of lines of the detected reference
signal.
SELECT FIELD : ASYNC/ODD/EVEN/FIELD
Displays the switching timing of matrix.
POWER SUPPLIES : ON/INVALID
Displays whether the power supply unit is inserted or not.
FANx : ROT/STOP
Displays whether the rear panel fan is rotating or not.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (HDS-X3000 Series)
Purpose
Purpose is to display the internal status of the equipment.
There are no setting on this screen.
Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
secondary station.
DISPLAY UNIT STATUS
HDS-X3400 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 1
DISPLAY UNIT STATUS
HDS-X3700 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 1
MAIN
REV
CN 01-16
HD SDI
REV
1.0
P.S
OK
MAIN
REV CN01-16 REV CN17-32 REV P.S
INPUT
01-16
INPUT
01-32
33-64
65-96
97-128
HD SDI 1.0
HD SDI
HD SDI
HD SDI
INVALID
1.0 HD SDI
1.0 HD SDI
1.0 OK
1.0 OK
1.0 OK
1.0 HD 0pt16 1.0 HD SDI
1.0 SD SDI
INVALID
1.0 SD SDI
INVALID
MAIN
REV
CN 01-16
HD SDI
REV
1.0
P.S
OK
OUTPUT
01-32
33-64
65-96
97-128
OUTPUT
01-16
MAIN
REV CN01-16 REV CN17-32 REV P.S REF FANA FANB
HD SDI 1.0
HD SDI
HD SDI
HD SDI
INVALID
1.0 HD SDI
1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK
A
B
A
ROT ROT
ROT ROT
ROT ROT
ROT ROT
1.0 HD 0pt16 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK
1.0 SD SDI
INVALID
1.0 SD SDI 1.0 OK
INVALID
FRONT PANEL BKS-R3400
A
B
CONTROL BOARD
MAIN S-BUS
V1.00 V1.00
REFERENCE SIGNAL
SELECT FIELD
1125p
FIELD
ON
CONTROL BOARD
MAIN S-BUS MONITOR
V1.00 V1.00 V1.00
INVALID
REFERENCE SIGNAL
SELECT FIELD
1125p 625
FIELD ODD
POWER SUPPLIES
M
B
POWER SUPPLIES
ON
INVALID
FAN1 FAN2
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6
ROT ROT ROT ROT ROT ROT
ROT
ROT
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Display Screen (HDS-X3700)
Example of Display Screen (HDS-X3400)
Description of contents on display
MAIN or CN01-16/CN17-32: HD SDI/SD SDI/HD 0pt8/
INVALID
Displays whether the board (MAIN) to be inserted from
the front and the rear connector board (CN01-16/CN17-
32), are inserted or not.
DISPLAY UNIT STATUS
HDS-X3600 V1.00
STATION NUMBER 1
MAIN
HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI
HD SDI 1.0 HD 0pt16 1.0 HD SDI
REV CN01-16 REV CN17-32
REV P.S
INPUT
01-32
33-64
1.0 HD SDI
1.0 OK
1.0 OK
OUTPUT
01-32
33-64
MAIN
HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI
HD SDI 1.0 HD 0pt16 1.0 HD SDI
REV CN01-16 REV CN17-32
REV P.S REF FANA FANB
1.0 HD SDI
1.0 OK
1.0 OK
A
B
ROT ROT
ROT ROT
P.S : OK/NG
Displays the power supply status of the MAIN and two CN boards.
A
B
CONTROL BOARD
MAIN S-BUS MONITOR
REFERENCE SIGNAL
1125p 625
FIELD ODD
REV : REVISION of the boards
SELECT FIELD
M
B
V1.00 V1.00 V1.00
INVALID
POWER SUPPLIES
ON
INVALID
REF : A/B
FAN1 FAN2
ROT
ROT
Displays which of the two types of the reference signal is selected.
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
REFERENCE SIGNAL : 525i/625i/1125i
Displays the number of lines of the detected reference signal.
Example of Display Screen (HDS-X3600)
SELECT FIELD : ASYNC/ODD/EVEN/FIELD/(ASYNC)
Displays the switching timing of the matrix.
POWER SUPPLIEDS : ON/INVALID/OVERLOAD
Displays the status of the power supply unit. When
OVERLOAD is displayed as this status, it means that the
excess number of rear optical connectors more than the
specified number are installed.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)
Z : SET SDI FORMAT (HDS-X3000 Series)
FANA, FANB : ROT/STOP
Purpose
Displays whether the fan on the matrix board is rotating or
not.
This menu is used to set the signal format for the output
board of the HDS-X3000 series (whether the signal is
reclocked in the HD-SDI or not) from the control terminal.
This setting becomes valid when the dip switch of the
RECLOCK BYPASS of the output board is turned off.
When the processor unit of HDS-X3000 series has the SD-
SDI output board (HKDS-X3050), the setting of the format
is not required.
FANn : ROT/STOP
Displays whether the fan of the main unit (except the
power supply unit) is rotating or not.
FRONT PANEL : BKS-R3400/INVALID
Displays whether the option switch is attached to the front
of the HDS-X3400 or not.
Setting Procedure
1. Select the menu item “Z”.
n
2. Select the desired channel line using the cursor to be
set. (The HDS-X3400 will be switched in every four
channels, and the HDS-X3600/X3700 will be switched
in every eight channels.)
If the board (MAIN) to be inserted from the front is not
installed, the status of the rear connector board is not
displayed correctly.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting changes (“HD
SDI (RC)” ↔ “HD SDI (RC PASS)”).
4. Press [S] (Table Set), and the content now on display
is copied to the area of SDI FORMAT TABLE.
n
Unless pressing [S] (Table Set), the data will be
deleted when the power is turned off.
5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and return to the
menu screen of the secondary station.
SELECT SDI FORMAT
DESTINATION UNIT
HDS-X3400 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE UNIT
01 - 04 : HD SDI(RC)
05 - 08 : HD SDI(RC)
09 - 12 : HD SDI(RC)
13 - 16 : HD SDI(RC)
01 - 04 :
05 - 08 :
09 - 12 :
13 - 16 :
SWITCHING FIELD
FIELD
F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD S:Table Set
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen (HDS-X3400)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)
Operating Function Keys
SELECT SDI FORMAT
DESTINATION UNIT
HDS-X3600 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
[F1] : FORMAT (Mode in which the HDS-X3400 is set in
the units of the four channels and the HDS-X3600/
X3700 is set in the units of the eight channels)
SOURCE UNIT
REFERENCE SELECT
01 - 32 : A
01 - 08 : HD SDI(RC)
01 - 08 :
09 - 16 :
17 - 24 :
25 - 32 :
33 - 40 :
41 - 48 :
49 - 56 :
57 - 64 :
09 - 16 : HD SDI(RC)
17 - 24 : HD SDI(RC)
HD SDI (RC) :
When the input signal is HD-
SDI, the signal is reclocked
and is output.)
25 - 32 : HD SDI(RC)
33 - 40 : HD SDI(RC PASS)
41 - 48 : HD SDI(RC PASS)
49 - 56 : HD SDI(RC PASS)
57 - 64 : HD SDI(RC PASS)
33 - 64 : A
HD SDI (RC PASS) : The input signal is bypassed
and is output as it is.
SWITCHING FIELD
A:FIELD B:ODD
[F2] : FIELD (Mode which sets the crosspoint switching
field)
F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD F3:REFERE S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
1. Press [F2]. The cursor moves to “SWITCH-
ING FIELD” on the screen.
Example of Setting Screen (HDS-X3600)
2. Move the cursor to ERF.A ↔ REF.B using the
cursor key of the keyboard.
3. Press [Enter]. The status changes as follows.
(ODD → EVEN → FIELD → ASYNC →
ODD . . .)
SELECT SDI FORMAT
DESTINATION UNIT
HDS-X3700 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE UNIT
REFERENCE SELECT
01 - 32 : A
01 - 08 : HD SDI(RC)
09 - 16 : HD SDI(RC)
17 - 24 : HD SDI(RC)
25 - 32 : HD SDI(RC)
33 - 40 : HD SDI(RC PASS) 33 - 40 :
41 - 48 : HD SDI(RC PASS) 41 - 48 :
01 - 08 :
09 - 16 :
17 - 24 :
25 - 32 :
33 - 64 : A
49 - 56 :
57 - 64 :
65 - 72 :
73 - 80 :
81 - 88 :
89 - 96 :
97 - 104 :
105 - 112 :
113 - 120 :
121 - 128 :
49 - 56 :
57 - 64 :
65 - 72 :
73 - 80 :
81 - 88 :
89 - 96 :
97 - 104 :
105 - 112 :
113 - 120 :
121 - 128 :
65 - 96 : B
97 - 128 : B
[F3] : REFERE (Mode which selects the reference of the
switching timing of the crosspoint in units of the
output 32 channels)
1. Press [F3]. The cursor moves to “REFER-
ENCE SELECT” on the screen.
SWITCHING FIELD
A:FIELD
B:ODD
F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD F3:REFERE S:Table Set
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
2. Select a channel using the cursor of the key-
board.
3. Press [Enter]. The setting changes. (A ↔ B)
Example of Setting Screen (HDS-X3700)
n
When using both the CART protocol and S-BUS in RS-
422A, set REFERENCE (switching timing) to A and
SWITCHING FIELD to ODD. If other setting is per-
formed, the switching timing is sometimes not executed
correctly.
In addition, the switching timing is sometimes not execut-
ed correctly if SWITCHING FIELD is set in other combi-
nations. For more details about the signal switching
timings, refer to “5-8. Signal Switching Timing”.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)
Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT
(DVS-V3232M/DVS-V6464M)
Purpose
Operating Function Keys
This menu is used to set the format of signals fed to the
input/output board of DVS-V3232M and DVS-V6464M
with the control terminal.
This setting is available when the REM/LOC switch for the
format on each input/output board is OFF.
[F1] : FORMAT (Mode which sets the signal format by 8-
channels)
[F2] : FIELD (Mode which sets the crosspoint switching
field)
1. Press [F2]. The cursor will move to “SWITCH
ING FIELD” in the menu.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item “Z”.
2. Press [Enter]. The setting will change.
(ODD → EVEN → FIELD → ASYNC → ODD···)
All switching field in the switcher are deter
mined by this setting.
2. Select a channel line using the cursor to be set. (The
channels will be switched by eight channels.
Displayed signal formats that are enclosed by the
round brackets as “(270 Mbps)” have been set on the
board and cannot be modified with the control termi-
nal.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting will change
(“143 Mbps” → “117 Mbps” → “270 Mbps” →
“AUTO”).
When a display “(ASYNC)” appears on the
screen, it indicates that the cross-point selector
field has been set in the ASYNC (asynchro-
nous) position on the CPU-149 board (S4-1). It
means that the setting cannot be changed from
the control terminal.
4. Press [S] (Table Set), and the content now appeared is
copied to the area of SDI FORMAT TABLE.
5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and return to the
menu screen of the secondary station.
n
To use RS-422A and S-BUS together, set the switching
field as follows.
1 When using the S-BUS and CART protocol together :
ODD
2 When using the S-BUS and PRODUCTION
SWITCHER protocol together : FIELD
SELECT SDI FORMAT
DESTINATION UNIT
DVS-V6464M V3.00 STATION NUMBER 1
SOURCE UNIT
01 - 08 : 270 Mbps
09 - 16 : 143 Mbps
17 - 24 : 270 Mbps
25 - 32 : 143 Mbps
33 - 40 : 360 Mbps
41 - 48 : 540 Mbps
49 - 56 :( 270 Mbps )
57 - 64 : AUTO
01 - 08 : 270 Mbps
09 - 16 : 270 Mbps
17 - 24 : 270 Mbps
25 - 32 : 270 Mbps
33 - 40 : 270 Mbps
41 - 48 : 270 Mbps
49 - 56 :( 270 Mbps )
57 - 64 : 270 Mbps
Note that the switching timing of the CART will not be
accurate if the CART and PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
protocols are used together.
Switching timing is not guaranteed in the combination of
different switching fields.
SWITCHING FIELD
FIELD
For details of the signal switching timing, refer to “5-8.
Signal Switching Timing”.
F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD S:Table Set
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
Example of Setting Screen
n
Unless pressing [S], the data will be deleted when the
power is turned off.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)
“AUTO” stands for “AUTO LOCK” mode in which the input signal format (143/177/270/360/540 Mbps)
is automatically identified and the equipment runs on an appropriate signal format.
The signal format setting can be changed by pressing either [Enter] or [F].
[Enter]
[F]
or
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[F]
[Enter]
143 Mbps
177 Mbps
270 Mbps
AUTO
360 Mbps
540 Mbps
[F]
or
[Enter]
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)
Comparison Table between Models
Item
S-P1
S-P2
BVS-V3232(*1) DVS-V6464B/
V6464M(*2)
BKPF-R70
DVS-128(*3)
BKPF-R70A
Dedicated CPU for communication
SOFT MATRIX
_
1
2
1
2
_
_
64
_
128
A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA
B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
C : SET DESTINATION NAME
D : SET SOURCE NAME
512 x 512
512 x 512
512 x 512
1024 x 1024 1024 x 1024
16
512
512
8
16
16
512
512
8
32
32
512
1024
1024
16
1024
1024
16
512
E : SET LEVEL TABLE
8
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM
J : NAME STYLE(Type+Num)
L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT
M : SET INHIBIT TABLE
_
O
O
O
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
4095
4095
O
2800
O
2800
O
_
O
_
512
512
512
1024
4
1024
1024
2048
255
O
1024
1024
2048
255
O
_
512
N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME
O : SET TIE LINES
_
1024
_
4
P : CHANGE PASSWORD
Q : CHANGE CROSSPOINT
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION
S : SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT
T : SET CLOCK
O
1
O
O
8
8
8
8
O
_
O
O
O
O
_
_
O
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
U : SELECT CONTROL MODE
W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG
X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION
Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE
A : SET UNIT LOCATION
3
1
1
1
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
512
T
_
512 (1024)
512
T
_
1024
O
1024
O
K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
M : SET MONITOR FUNCTION
Includes the following models.
T
O
O
_
(*1) DVS-V1616, BVS-A3232, BVS-V3232, DVS-TC3232, DVS-RS1616
(*2) DVS-V3232B/V3232M
(*3) HDS-X3400/X3600/X3700
The CPU performance is the relative value when the DVS-V6464B is taken as the standard value 1.
The models to which triangle mark T is set in the RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE, the mark indicates that it is partially
initialized.
The TIE LINES function of 4 and that of 255 have the different structure and different functions.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Functions and Menu Items
Function
Purpose
Menu item
Station type
Standard setting
Initializing table data
Set/change password
Set time clock
K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
P : CHANGE PASSWORD
T : SET CLOCK
Primary station
Select warning display ON/OFF
Set type name
V : SELECT WARNING DISPLAY
B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
J : NAME STYLE
Select input/output name style
Set destination name
Set source name
C : SET DESTINATION NAME
D : SET SOURCE NAME
Set description name group
Set level table
N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP
E : SET LEVEL TABLE
Set active unit number
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
Copy main CPU data to backup CPU G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
Set physical assignment
Call secondary station
Set unit location
L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION
A : SET UNIT LOCATION
Secondary
Copy main CPU data to backup CPU G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER station (switcher)
Copy table data
L : COPY TABLE DATA
Z : SET PANEL STATUS
N : SET PANEL TABLE
Secondary
station
Set panel status
Set panel table
(remote control
Set available destination style
O : SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION unit)
Crosspoint disable setting function
Global phantom function
M : SET INHIBIT TABLE
Primary station
H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM
H : SET PHANTOM TABLE
Primary station
Local phantom
function
Set phantom function
Secondary
station
Protect function
Secret function
Set protect function
Set secret function
C : SET DESTINATION NAME
D: SET SOURCE NAME
Primary station
Primary station
Primary station
Primary station
Primary station
Tie line management Set tie line system
O : SET TIE LINES
RS-422A
Select RS-422A control mode
U : SELECT CONTROL MODE
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION
U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL
9-pin remote control Call secondary station
Select 9-pin remote protocol
Secondary
station
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function
Purpose
Menu item
Station type
Monitor function
Call secondary station
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION
Primary station
Call primary station on monitor S-BUS M : SET MONITOR FUNCTION
Secondary
station
Set active unit number
Select monitor mode
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
Monitor S-BUS
primary station
M : SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION
Call secondary station on monitor S-BUS R : CALL SECONDARY STATION
Set available monitor unit
Set panel table
M : SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE Monitor S-BUS
N : SET PANEL TABLE
secondary
station
Copy table data
L : COPY TABLE DATA
Display Description name
Set panel status
S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Z : SET PANEL STATUS
Others
Display control area
Change crosspoint
A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA
Q : CHANGE CROSSPOINT
S : SELECT INDICATION COLOR
W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG
X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION
Y : DISPLAY TABLE DATA
Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE
K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS
Y : DISPLAY TABLE DATA
Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT
Primary station
Select indication color
Display system status log
Display S-BUS communication
Display table data
Set unit detectable
Reset table data to default
Display unit status
Secondary
station
Display table data
Select SDI format
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The material contained in this manual consists of
information that is the property of Sony Corporation.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of
any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any
purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the
equipment described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.
Le matériel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en
informations qui sont la propriété de Sony Corporation.
Sony Corporation interdit formellement la copie de
quelque partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi
pour tout autre but que des opérations ou entretiens de
l’équipement à moins d’une permission écrite de Sony
Corporation.
Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus
Informationen, die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind.
Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdrücklich die
Vervielfältigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den
Gebrauch derselben für irgendeinen anderen Zweck als
die Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung
beschriebenen
Ausrüstung
ohne
ausdrückliche
schriftliche Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BVS-A3232 (SY)
BVS-V3232 (SY)
DVS-128 (SY)
DVS-A3232 (EK)
DVS-RS1616 (SY)
DVS-TC3232 (SY)
DVS-V1616 (SY)
DVS-V3232B (SY)
DVS-V3232M (SY)
DVS-V6464B (SY)
DVS-V6464M (SY)
HDS-X3400 (SY)
HDS-X3600 (SY)
HDS-X3700 (SY)
HDS-V3232 (JN) E
3-194-351-06
Printed in Japan
2000. 7 16
©1997
Sony Corporation
Communication System Solutions Network Company
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|